course synopsis - universiti malaysia...

113
FACULTY OF HUMANITIES, ARTS AND HERITAGE 1 COURSE SYNOPSIS BACHELOR IN SOCIAL SCIENCES (HONORS) CODE BPKP PROGRAMMES OFFERED HA02 Communication HA12 Industrial Relations HA14 Sociology & Social Anthropology HA15 International Relations HA18 Geography HA24 History BACHELOR OF ARTS WITH HONORS CODE BPKP PROGRAMMES OFFERED HA05 Music Studies HA11 Creative Arts BACHELOR OF VISUAL ARTS TECHNOLOGY WITH HONOURS CODE BPKP PROGRAMMES OFFERED HA32 Visual Arts Technology BACHELOR OF ISLAMIC STUDIES WITH HONORS CODE BPKP PROGRAMMES OFFERED HI15 Islamic Studies

Upload: others

Post on 05-Mar-2021

7 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

FACULTY OF HUMANITIES, ARTS AND HERITAGE

1

COURSE SYNOPSIS

BACHELOR IN SOCIAL SCIENCES (HONORS)

CODE BPKP PROGRAMMES OFFERED

HA02 Communication

HA12 Industrial Relations

HA14 Sociology & Social Anthropology

HA15 International Relations

HA18 Geography

HA24 History

BACHELOR OF ARTS WITH HONORS

CODE BPKP PROGRAMMES OFFERED

HA05 Music Studies

HA11 Creative Arts

BACHELOR OF VISUAL ARTS TECHNOLOGY WITH HONOURS

CODE BPKP PROGRAMMES OFFERED

HA32 Visual Arts Technology

BACHELOR OF ISLAMIC STUDIES WITH HONORS

CODE BPKP PROGRAMMES OFFERED

HI15 Islamic Studies

Page 2: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

2

MUSIC STUDIES (HAO5)

CM10102 THEORY AND HARMONY I

This is an introductory theory and harmony course, where students get to study the music foundation which are essential to

develop their skills and take them to a higher level. The study covers harmonic progression and also, it deepens the

understanding of musical structure. The students also study transposition, identify basic tonal sounds, melodic composition, and

analysis of different genre of music.

References

Wyatt, K. (1998). Harmony and Theory. Milwaukee : Hal, Leonard.

Pople, A. (1994). Theory, analysis and meaning in Music. New York : Cambridge University Press. Turek, R. (1996). The

Elements of Music. New York : The McGraw Hill

Damschroder, D. (1992). Foundations of Music and Musicianship. New York : Schirmer Books Schenker, H. (1998). Harmony.

Chicago : The University Of Chicago Press.

Taylor, E. (1998). The AB Guide to Music Theory , Part I. London : The Associated Board of the Royal Schools of Music.

CM10302 PRACTICAL INSTRUMENTAL: MAJOR STUDY I

This course provides students with the most up-to-date playing and performing techniques, including vocal, that are currently

practice by professional instrumentalist/soloist in the music industry. The music program consists of professional musicia ns and

music educators with many years of working experience in the music industry. Strong emphasis is given to the development of

music reading and various techniques relating music phrasing, articulation and dynamics. All students are assessed through weekly

progress and mid-terms and final exam.

References

Bailey,W. 1992. Teaching Brass:A Rezourse Manual. USA: McGraw. Lamb,N. 1994.

Guide to Teach Strings. 6th. Edition. USA: McGraw-Hill.

Spohn, C. 1993. The Percussion : Performance and Instructional Techniques. Boston : Allyn and Bacon Inc. Starr,

Constance. 1992. Practical Piano Skills. (5th edit.). USA: McGraw.

Tanner, Paul O. 1997. Jazz (8th.edit.). USA: McGraw. Ware,C. 1998.

Basic of Vocal Pedagogy. USA: McGraw.

Westphal, F. 1992. Guide to Teaching Woodwinds (5th edit.). USA: McGraw.

CM10501 PRACTICAL INSTRUMENTAL: MINOR STUDY I

This course provides students with the fundamentals of playing with the Keyboard in a Lab. Strong emphasis is given to the

development of music reading, composing melody and identifying chord structures. All students are assessed through weekly

progress, mid-terms and final exam. Lab content is musically related to ensemble playing, arranging music course and private

instruction.

References

Bailey,W. 1992. Teaching Brass:A Rezourse Manual. USA: McGraw. Lamb,N. 1994.

Guide to Teach Strings. 6th. Edition. USA: McGraw-Hill.

Page 3: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

3

Spohn, C. 1993. The Percussion : Performance and Instructional Techniques.Boston : Allyn and Bacon Inc. Starr,

Constance. 1992. Practical Piano Skills. (5th edit.). USA: McGraw.

Tanner, Paul O. 1997. Jazz (8th.edit.). USA: McGraw. Ware,C. 1998. Basic of Vocal Pedagogy. USA: McGraw.

Westphal, F. 1992. Guide to Teaching Woodwinds (5th edit.). USA: McGraw.

CM10901 ENSEMBEL INSTRUMENTS & VOCAL I

This course provide students with the opportunity to join an ensemble according to their knowledge of a particular instrument.

Those who are vocal major and those who do not have any formal music training in orchestral instruments is encouraged to join

the vocal choir. Those with formal training in musical instruments such as strings, brass, saxophones, flutes, clarinets and

keyboards are required to join the orchestra. The instrumental / vocal ensemble focus on the performance in a variety of musical

styles. Classes will cover performance techniques utilized in contemporary musical idioms such as jazz, rock, and pop.

References

Dornemann, J., 1992. Complete Preparation - A Guide to Auditioning for Opera. Excalibur Publishing. Agricola, J. F., 1995.

Introduction to the Art of Singing. Cambridge Uni. Press.

Ware, C., 1995. Adventures in Singing - A process for Exploring, Discovering and Developing Vocal Potential. McGraw Hill.

Brinson,, B. A. 1996. Choral Music. – Methods and Materials – Developing Successful Choral Programs. Schirmer Books. Bennett,

P.D., & Bartholomew , D. R. 1997. Singing in the Education of Children. Wadsworth Publishing Company.

Collins, D.L., 1999. Teaching Choral Music. Prentice Hall. Novak, E. A., 1988. Performing in Musicals. Schirmer Books. Tower, M. G.

, 1997. Choral Connection Level I Mixed Voices. McGraw Hill.

CM 11102 TEXTURAL ANALYSIS OF WESTERN MUSIC I

This course is an introductory to western music history, providing students with an understanding of music from the medieval to

the Baroque period. Students are required to do listening, discussion and music analysis. The course will cover the introduction of

musical elements, forms and stylistic performance from these early periods and it provide students with exposure to a variety of

musical compositions from leading composers from each era.

References

Kamien, R. (1998) . Music : An Appreciation. New York : McGraw Hill. Ferris .J. (1999) . Music : The Art of Listening. New York :

McGraw Hill. Zorn, J.( 2000) . Listening to music. New Jersey : Prentice Hall.

Bennett, R.(1995). History of Music .New York :Cambridge University Press Yudkin. J. (2004). Discover Music. Pearson: Prentice

Hall.

CM10701 AURAL TRAINING I

This course is important to the students in providing knowledge on basic concepts of intervals, chords and rhythm. The course is

supporting other music courses: orchestra, harmony, modern harmony, composition, arrangement and conducting. The course is

training students in the recognition and transcription of rhythms, intervals, chords, melodies, as well as the singing of melodies

using solfege.

The level I of Ear Training is the first and most basic of a series of four courses offered in a students’ first 4 semesters at UMS.

The methodology will be more or less the same with other semesters of the Ear Training, but the contents here are introductory in

Page 4: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

4

nature. This level will be touching on the basics of solfege. Students will be taught the basics of music dictation skills. Students

also will be taught the methods of hand signals and spoken syllables that will assist them in rapidly recognizing the various

patterns given to them. Assessment will be done via written examinations targeting Rhythmic, Interval, Chordal, and Melodic

dictations. On this basis the students will be assessed throughout the course.

References

Eslava, Hilario - Metodo de Solfeo

Danhauser, Adolphe - Solfège des Solfèges

Knowles, Greg - Reading Exercises for Solfège, 2nd Edition. Helion Group, 2003

Prosser, Steve - Essential Ear Training for the Contemporary Musician, Berklee Press, 2000

Monroe, L. (1975). Ear Training 1 and 2, Berklee Publishing

CM10402 PRACTICAL INSTRUMENTAL: MAJOR STUDY II

This course provides students with the latest playing and performing techniques, including vocal, that are currently practice by

professional instrumentalist/soloist in the music industry. Strong emphasis is given to the development of music reading and

various techniques relating music phrasing, articulation and dynamics. All students are assessed through weekly progress and

mid-terms and final exam. Students are required to sit for proficiency test for the major instruments through, either ABRSM,

Australian Guild of Examination or examination that are recognized by the Universiti Malaysia Sabah upon their graduation.

References

Bailey,W. 1992. Teaching Brass:A Rezourse Manual. USA: McGraw. Lamb,N. 1994. Guide to Teach Strings. (6th. Edit.). USA:

McGraw-Hill.

Spohn, C. 1993. The Percussion : Performance and Instructional Techniques. Boston : Allyn and Bacon Inc. Starr,

Constance. 1992. Practical Piano Skills (5th editi.). USA: McGraw.

Tanner, Paul O. 1997. Jazz (8th.edit.). USA: McGraw. Ware,C. 1998. Basic of Vocal Pedagogy. USA: McGraw. Westphal, F.

1992 Guide to Teaching Woodwinds (5th edit.). USA: McGraw.

CM10601 PRACTICAL INSTRUMENTAL: MINOR STUDY II

This course provides students with the fundamentals playing and performing techniques for Keyboard Lab. Strong emphasis is

given to the development of music reading and various techniques related sucah as phrasing, articulation & dynamic. All students

are assessed through weekly progress and mid-terms and final exam. Students are advised to sit for proficiency test for the minor

instruments through, ABRSM, Australian Guild of Examination or examination that are recognized by the Universiti Malaysia Sabah

upon their graduation.

References

Starr,Constance. 1992. Practical Piano Skills (5th editi.). USA: McGraw.

CM10202 THEORY AND HARMONY II

This course is a continuation from Music Theory and Harmony I. The course covers music theory of grade 6, similar to the theory

syllabus of the associated Board of the Royal Schools of Music, London. This course emphasize on the study of tonal harmony and

Page 5: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

5

melody, writing for keyboard, transposition, basic composition and arrangement of voices / instruments and the analysis of music

for vocal and orchestral scores.

References

Wyatt, K. (1998). Harmony and Theory. Milwaukee : Hal, Leonard.

Pople, A. (1994). Theory, analysis and meaning in Music. New York : Cambridge University Press. Turek, R. (1996). The Elements

of Music. New York : The McGraw Hill

Damschroder, D. (1992). Foundations of Music and Musicianship. New York : Schirmer Books Schenker, H. (1998). Harmony.

Chicago : The University Of Chicago Press.

Taylor, Eric, (1998). The AB Guide To Music Theory Part II.

London : The Associated Board of the Royal School of Music Publishing.

Loh, Phaik Kheng. (1991). A Handbook of Music Theory, Part I1. Penang : Rhythm Distributor Sdn Bhd.

CM11201 INSTRUMENTAL & VOCAL ENSEMBLE II

This course provide students with the opportunity to join an ensemble according to their knowledge of a particular instrument .

Those who are vocal major and those who do not have any formal music training in orchestral instruments is encouraged to join

the vocal choir. Those with formal training in musical instruments such as strings, brass, saxophones, flutes, clarinets and

keyboards are required to join the orchestra.

References

Dornemann, J., 1992. Complete Preparation - A Guide to Auditioning for Opera. Excalibur Publishing. Agricola, J. F., 1995.

Introduction to the Art of Singing. Cambridge Uni. Press.

Ware, C., 1995. Adventures in Singing - A process for Exploring, Discovering and Developing Vocal Potential. McGraw Hill.

Brinson,, B. A. 1996. Choral Music. - Methods and Materials - Developing Successful Choral Programs. Schirmer Books. Bennett,

P.D., & Bartholomew , D. R. 1997. Singing in the Education of Children. Wadsworth Publishing Company. Collins,D.L., 1999.

Teaching Choral Music. Prentice Hall.

Novak, E. A., 1988. Performing in Musicals. Schirmer Books.

Tower, M. G. , 1997. Choral Connection Level I Mixed Voices. McGraw Hill.

CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION

This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation Technology. The studies covers not only the knowledge in music notation, but

also the history and the development of musical notation, music notation for education, understand the differen t types of musical

score notation used in different settings such as in concerts, smaller ensembles, symphonic band, big orchestra and commercial

jazz band.

References

Cobas, Gabriel. 2011. Mastering Sibelius 6. Course Technology, a part of Cenagage Learning. Boston, MA Sibelius 7 User Manual

Guide.

Page 6: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

6

CM10801 AURAL TRAINING II

This course is important to the students in providing knowledge on basic concepts of intervals, chords and rhythm. The course is

supporting other music courses: orchestra, harmony, modern harmony, composition, arrangement and conducting. The course is

training students in the recognition and transcription of rhythms, intervals, chords, melodies, as well as the singing of melodies

using solfege.

The level II of Ear Training is the continuation from semester one. This course is offered to the students from semester one until

semester four and the methodology will be more less the same with other semesters of the Ear Training, but the contents are

different. This level will be touching on Pitch, Melody, Rhythm, Intervals and Texture. Students will be recognizing the

basics of melody, the listening implication and its notation. They will be asked to play back and rewrite wha t they have listened (8

bars) for rhythm and melody in one voice up to 8 bars. Students also wi ll be thought the timing patterns and introduction to

conducting methods. They have to know the tempo terms and all basic chords (including D7) in root position and all inversions.

They have to sing using the original names and sol-fa for the notes. On this basis the students will be assessed throughout the

course.

References

Monroe, L. (1975). Ear Training 2, Berklee Publishing.

Danyszowa, H., Iszkowska, Z., Jargon, J., Leitner, M., Moszumanska-Nazar, K. (1996). Exercises to practice Sol-Fa, PWM Edition.

Dziewulska, M., Fraczkiewicz, A., Pawlowska, K. (1996). Materials for Sol-fa training, PWM Edition. Lasocki, J. K. (2001). Sol-fa -

part 1, PWM Edition.

Drogomirov, P. (2001). Sol-fa, “Music” Edition.

CM11601 MALAYSIAN TRADITIONAL MUSIC I

This course give students the opportunity to play traditional instruments that are commonly found in Malaysia and one of these

instruments is the gamelan. The students are taught to read numbers, a form of musical notation, to play the various gongs that

are found in a Gamelan ensemble. Local repertoires would include traditional and popular tunes.

References

Tan Sooi Beng. 1984. Asas-asas Muzik. USM Pulau Pinang.

Mohd. Ghouse Nasaruddin, 1989. Muzik Melayu Tradisi. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka

Matusky, P. & Tan, S.B. (1997). Muzik Malaysia : Tradisi Klasik, Rakyat dan Sinkretik. Pulau Pinang : Asian Centre Penang &

Akademi Seni Kebangsaan.

Aziz Deraman & Wan Ramli Wan Mohamad. (1994). Muzik dan Nyanyian Tradisi Melayu. Kuala Lumpur : Fajar Bakti.

Nik Mustapha Nik Mohd. Salleh. (1998). Alat Muzik Tradisional Dalam Masyarakat Melayu. Kementerian Kebudayaan, Kesenian dan

warisan Malaysia.

CM21502 MAJOR STUDY III

Major study III is a continuation of Major study II. Students received a one (1) hour individual lessons with their lecturers once a

week. At the end of the semester, the student is assessed and graded. During semester 2, each student is given a set of pieces

and scale to practice for the duration of the semester.

Page 7: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

7

References

Miedlar, M. (1998). Cello school, part.1, Krakow: PWM Edition Miedlar, M. (1992). Little Album for the Cellist, Krakow: PWM Edition

Wilkomirski, K. - 12 Studies for Violoncello in the first position, Karakow: PWM Edition Lee, S. 22 Very Easy

Duets Opus 126, New York: International Music Company

Ducan, C. (1991). Christmas solos for beginning cello, USA: Mel Bay Publication, INC., Pacific, MO.

CM22302 ARRANGING FOR CHAMBER MUSIC

This course introduces student to the art of constructing musical arrangement, using various instruments in a chamber

settings. Students are introduced in the construction and the progression of Chords (harmony) to support a given melody. The

learning outcome from this course is the students’ ability to understand the relationship between melody and harmony in their

musical arrangement. The course, also cover topics such as the types of musical forms, the basic of writing for the drum, guitar,

bass guitar, piano, brass and saxophone. Various arrangement technique such as rhythmic alteration / variation, melodic

alteration, transposition, embellishment, syncopation and the range of musical instruments will be covered in this course.

References

Doezema, R. 1990. Arranging I. Boston: Berklee series publication. Kennan, K. 1990. The Techniuqe of Orchestration. N. Jersey

Prentise Hall. Nettles, Barrie. Harmony 1. Boston: Berklee series publication.

Pople, A. 1994. Theory, Analysis and Meaning in Music. Great Britian: Cambridge University Press. Ted, Pease. 1995.

Arranging for Big Band and Score Analysis. Boston: Berklee series publication.

CM 21302 HARMONY AND COMPOSITION I

The content of the course is based on the Theory Syllabus Grade Seven of Associated Board of the Royal Schools of Music,

London. This course emphasizes on the study of tonal and modern harmony of melody, transposition, basic composition and

arrangement of voices and instruments, rewriting a given passage to include appropriate suspensions and notes of melodic

decoration and analysis of music scores.

References

Howard, J. (1990). Learning to compose. New York : Cambridge University Press.

Pople, A. (1994). Theory, analysis and meaning in Music. New York : Cambridge University Press. Turek, R. (1996) . The Elements

of Music. New York : The McGraw Hill Co. Damschroder,D. (1992).Foundation of Music and Musicianship. New York : Schirmer

Books. Schenker, H. (1998) . Harmony. Chicago : The University Of Chicago.

Taylor, Eric, (1998). The AB Guide To Music Theory Part II. London : The Associated Board of the Royal School of Music

Publishing.

Loh, Phaik Kheng. (1991). A Handbook of Music Theory, Part I1. Penang : Rhythm Distributor Sdn Bhd.

CM21901 AURAL TRAINING III

This course is essential for students to improve listening skills, especially on chords, sight reading, rhythm, intervals, Sc ales

& Melody. Students must passed ear training II before taking this course. The course aims to improve the listening skills and sight

singing ability of students. To develop the listening skills, students are trained to recognize rhythmic patterns, melo dic shapes,

harmonies, intervals, scales, and rhythms. The course also covers the recognition harmony with the triads and seventh chords.

Page 8: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

8

The course also cover singing scale exercises to strengthen their ability to recognize major, minor, diminish, and half diminish

scales.

References

Benward, B. 1996 Ear Training: A Technique for Listening 4th Edition. WmC. USA: McGraw-Hill Publishing. Benward, B. 1999.

Sightsinging Complete 6th Edition. USA: McGraw-Hill Publishing.

Clark,T.S. 1992. Arrays: A Worktet of Musical Patterns for Aural Development. USA: McGraw.

Prosser, S. 2000. Essential Ear Training for the Contemporary Musician. Berklee Press. Larry M. Workbook for Ear Training 1.

Berklee College of Music.UK.

Larry M. Workbook for Ear Training 2. Berklee College of Music.UK. Larry M. Workbook for Ear Training 3. Berklee College of

Music.UK.

Larry M. Workbook for Ear Training 4. Berklee College of Music.UK.

Gary H. Encyclopedia of Reading Rhythms. Hal Leonard. USA.

CM22101 INSTRUMENTAL & VOCAL ENSEMBLE III

This course provides students with the most up-to-date playing and performing techniques, including vocal, that are

currently practice by professional instrumentalist/soloist in the music industry. The music program consists of professional

musicians and music educators with many years of working experience in the music industry. Strong emphasis is given to the

development of music reading and various techniques relating music phrasing, articulation and dynamics. All students are

assessed through weekly progress and mid-terms and final exam.

References

Dornemann, J., 1992. Complete Preparation - A Guide to Auditioning for Opera. Excalibur Publishing. Agricola, J. F., 1995.

Introduction to the Art of Singing. Cambridge Uni. Press.

Ware, C., 1995. Adventures in Singing - A process for Exploring, Discovering and Developing Vocal Potential. McGraw Hill.

Brinson,, B. A. 1996. Choral Music. – Methods and Materials - Developing Successful Choral Programs. Schirmer Books. Bennett,

P.D., & Bartholomew , D. R. 1997. Singing in the Education of Children. Wadsworth Publishing Company.

Collins, D.L., 1999. Teaching Choral Music. Prentice Hall. Novak, E. A., 1988. Performing in Musicals. Schirmer Books. Tower, M. G.

, 1997. Choral Connection Level I Mixed Voices. McGraw Hill.

CM23101 MALAYSIAN MUSIC TRADITIONAL II

This course is a continuation of the course of study TRADITIONAL MUSIC I. In this course, students are taught to play Sabah’s

traditional instruments such as the bungkau, Sompoton, suling, Babadon, and Turali. Student are given various folk songs to be

played using these traditional musical instrument. The course teach students the theoretical foundations of traditional music using

Malaysia as a reference book for students.

References

Tan Sooi Beng. 1984. Asas-asas Muzik. USM Pulau Pinang.

Matusky, P. & Tan, S.B. (1997). Muzik Malaysia : Tradisi Klasik, Rakyat dan Sinkretik. Pulau Pinang : Asian Centre Penang &

Akademi Seni Kebangsaan.

Pugh Kitingan, Jacquline. 2004. Selected papers on Music in Sabah. Universiti Malaysia Sabah.

Pugh Kitingan, Jacquline. 2003. Alat-alat dan muzik instrumental Dusun Tambunan.Kota Kinabalu. Jabatan Kebudayaan dan

Page 9: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

9

Keseniaan Negeri Sabah.

Resot Iggau & Roslee HJ. Wahid. 2012. Proses pembuatan dan teknik asas permainan alat muzik Tongkungon suku kaum

KadazanDusun di Daerah Tambunan dan Keningau Sabah.Universiti Malaysia Sabah.

CM22901 MODERN HARMONY I

The course is an important subject as an introduction of basic modern Harmony to student. It is essential to strengthen their

understanding the concept of modern Harmony that is currently used in popular music, Jazz, Rock and other genres of music

making. The application of these harmonies is essential to understand how pop and jazz chords are used and the scales that these

chords or harmonies are formed. This course cover topics such as Scales, Harmony, Rhythms, and Music Analysis.

References

Doezema, R. 1990. Arranging I. Boston: Berklee series publication. Kennan, K. 1990. The Techniuqe of Orchestration. N. Jersey

Prentise Hall. Nettles, Barrie. Harmony 1. Boston: Berklee series publication.

Pople, A. 1994. Theory, Analysis and Meaning in Music. Great Britian: Cambridge University Press. Ted, Pease. 1995. Arranging for

Big Band and Score Analysis. Boston: Berklee series publication. Boras, Tom.

2005, Jazz Composition and Arranging, Belmont: Thomson Schirmer.

Taylor, Eric.1989. The AB Guide to Music Theory Part 1: The Associated Board of the Royal School of Music, London.

CM21602 MAJOR STUDY IV

This course provides students with the latest playing and performing techniques, including vocal, that are currently practice by

professional instrumentalist/soloist in the music industry. The music program consists of professional musicians and music

educators with many years of working experience in the music industry. Strong emphasis is given to the development of music

reading and various techniques relating music phrasing, articulation and dynamics. All students are assessed through weekly

progress, mid-terms and final exam. Students are required to sit for proficiency test for the major instruments through, either

ABRSM, Australian Guild of Examination or examination that are recognized by the Universiti Malaysia Sabah upon their

graduation.

References

Bailey,W. 1992. Teaching Brass:A Rezourse Manual. USA: McGraw. Lamb,N. 1994. Guide to Teach Strings. (6th. Edit.). USA:

McGraw-Hill.

Spohn, C. 1993. The Percussion : Performance and Instructional Techniques. Boston : Allyn and Bacon Inc. Starr,

Constance. 1992. Practical Piano Skills (5th editi.). USA: McGraw.

Tanner, Paul O. 1997. Jazz (8th.edit.). USA: McGraw. Ware,C. 1998. Basic of Vocal Pedagogy. USA: McGraw. Westphal, F.

1992 Guide to Teaching Woodwinds (5th edit.). USA: McGraw Tayton, S. (1992). 100 + Solos for saxophone Wise Publications

Hejda, T. (1981). Jazz study, PWM

Davies, J., Harris, P. (1988). 80 graded studies for saxophone, book 2, Faber Music Ltd.

CM22402 ARRANGING FOR BIG BAND

The course introduce the concepts and fundamental principles of music arranging. These will cover melodic analysis, construction

of harmony using different voicing technique, construction of rhythms, and re-harmonizing existing harmonies. This course focuses

Page 10: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

10

more on arranging for Big Band, where students are required to harmonize melodies with modern harmonies with its “available

tensions.” Students are also required to do “melodic analysis”, understand “harmonic rhythm”, “guide tone line”, “line clichés”,

“modal interchange”, “related ii-7” and the “blues”. The course is designed to equip students with various voicing techniques that

are commonly used in a small to full orchestra arrangements that includes; “four (4) parts writing”, “spread voicing”, “independent

lead,” “mixed soli voicing” and countermelodies or background writing in the arrangement.

References

Doezema, R. 1990. Arranging II. Boston: Berklee series publication.

Kennan, K. 1990. The Techniuqe of Orchestration. New Jersey: Prentise Hall. Nettles, Barrie. Harmony 1. Boston: Berklee series

publication.

Pople, A. 1994. Theory, Analysis and Meaning in Music. Great Britian: Cambridge University Press.

Ted, Pease. 1995. Arranging for Big Band and Score Analysis. Boston: Berklee series publication. Boras, Tom. 2005, Jazz

Composition and Arranging, Belmont: Thomson Schirmer.

CM 21402 HARMONY AND COMPOSITION II

This course covers music theory level grade 8 similar to the Associated Board of The Royal School of Music, London. This course is

an advanced study of musical harmonic vocabulary, the writing of piano

accompaniment for keyboard and orchestral instruments, such as the Trio sonata 18th century style for keyboard and two

orchestral instruments. Lastly, the course includes the analysis of musical score from different styles and different periods.

References

Howard, J. (1990). Learning to compose. New York : Cambridge University Press.

Pople, A. (1994). Theory, analysis and meaning in Music. New York : Cambridge University Press. Turek, R. (1996) . The Elements

of Music. New York : The McGraw Hill Co.

Damschroder,D. (1992).Foundation of Music and Musicianship. New York : Schirmer Books. Schenker, H. (1998) . Harmony.

Chicago : The University Of Chicago.

Taylor, Eric, (1998). The AB Guide To Music Theory Part II. London : The Associated Board of the Royal School of Music

Publishing.

Loh, Phaik Kheng. (1991). A Handbook of Music Theory, Part I1. Penang : Rhythm Distributor Sdn Bhd

CM22001 AURAL TRAINING IV

This course is a continuation of Aural Training III and is an advance level of the ear training syllabus. This syllabus teach es

students to sing with movable “do” in a wide variety of major, minor and modal scales. . Listening skills will be measured in two

ways; the ability to identify the pitch of the melody, modulation from one tonal center to the next, rhythmic patterns, Harmonic

progression, melodic intervals and scales. Secondly, the ability to write a melodic phrase in music notation. Student’s progress is

asses throughout the semester.

References

Benward, B. 1996 Ear Training: A Technique for Listening 4th Edition. WmC. USA: McGraw-Hill Publishing. Benward, B. 1999.

Sightsinging Complete 6th Edition. USA: McGraw-Hill Publishing.

Clark,T.S. 1992. Arrays: A Worktet of Musical Patterns for Aural Development. USA: McGraw.

Prosser, S. 2000. Essential Ear Training for the Contemporary Musician. Berklee Press.

Page 11: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

11

Larry M. Workbook for Ear Training 1. Berklee College of Music.UK. Larry M. Workbook for Ear Training 2. Berklee College of

Music.UK. Larry M. Workbook for Ear Training 3. Berklee College of Music.UK. Larry M. Workbook for Ear Training 4. Berklee

College of Music.UK. Gary H. Encyclopedia of Reading Rhythms. Hal Leonard. USA.

CM22201 INSTRUMENTAL & VOCAL ENSEMBEL IV

This course provides students with the most up-to-date playing and performing techniques, including vocal, that are

currently practice by professional instrumentalist/soloist in the music industry. The music program consists of professional

musicians and music educators with many years of working experience in the music industry. Strong emphasis is given to the

development of music reading and various techniques relating music phrasing, articulation and dynamics. All students are

assessed through weekly progress and mid-terms and final exam.

References

Dornemann, J., 1992. Complete Preparation - A Guide to Auditioning for Opera. Excalibur Publishing. Agricola, J. F., 1995.

Introduction to the Art of Singing. Cambridge Uni. Press.

Ware, C., 1995. Adventures in Singing - A process for Exploring, Discovering and Developing Vocal Potential. McGraw Hill.

Brinson,, B. A. 1996. Choral Music. - Methods and Materials - Developing Successful Choral Programs. Schirmer Books. Bennett,

P.D., & Bartholomew , D. R. 1997. Singing in the Education of Children. Wadsworth Publishing Company.

Collins, D.L., 1999. Teaching Choral Music. Prentice Hall. Novak, E. A., 1988. Performing in Musicals. Schirmer Books. Tower, M. G.

, 1997. Choral Connection Level I Mixed Voices. McGraw Hill.

CM22801 MUSIC AND BUSINESS MANAGEMENT

The music industry globally, worth billions. Music Industry activities are highly complex and diverse in terms of its implementation.

Thus, it is necessary to equip Individuals the knowledge of music business and its management by involving them in the music

and entertainment industry. The main objective of the course is to disseminate knowledge of the music business adequately to the

students through lecture, discussion and analysis of business data. Students will also be given the task of reviewing the

development of the local music industry more closely through field work to know the various organization and key individuals in

the music industry and establish a networking between the students with organizations in the music industry.

References

Attali, J. 1996. Noise: The Political Economy of Music. Univ. Of Minnesota Press. US. Barrow and

Newby. 1995. Inside the Music Business. Blueprint.

Fink M. 1996. Inside the Music Industry; Creativity, Process and Business. Schirmer Book. 1996 & 1997.

International Federation of Phonographic Industries, music and copyright.

D, Weissmen. 1997. The Music Business: Career Opportunities and self defence. Three Rivers Press, NY.

CM23001 MODERN HARMONY II

This course is a continuation of modern harmony 1 and its aim is to provide an advanced knowledge of Modern Harmony where it

can be applied in musical performance, arranging exercises and composition. It is essential to strengthen their understanding the

concept of Harmony especially when it involves harmonic tensions, modulation from one key to the next, altered scales, the

various scale modes and chord progression.

Page 12: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

12

References

Doezema, R. 1990. Arranging I. Boston: Berklee series publication. Kennan, K.

1990. The Techniuqe of Orchestration. N. Jersey Prentise Hall. Nettles, Barrie.

Harmony 1. Boston: Berklee series publication.

Pople, A. 1994. Theory, Analysis and Meaning in Music. Great Britian: Cambridge University Press. Ted, Pease. 1995. Arranging for

Big Band and Score Analysis. Boston: Berklee series publication. Boras, Tom.

2005, Jazz Composition and Arranging, Belmont: Thomson Schirmer.

Taylor, Eric.1989. The AB Guide to Music Theory Part 1: The Associated Board of the Royal School of Music, London.

CM22602 MUSIC PROGRAMMING

The course focuses on how to compose music from various genres using computer software. The study teaches students the

technique of producing sound using midi, audio editing and the process of producing an album.

References

Edstrom, Brent. 2001. Making Music with your Computer. (2nd Edition). Auburn Hills. MI

Keith, Gemmell. 2002. Get Creative with CUBASE VST; Composing and arranging with Cubase VST. PC Publishing Export

House 130 Vale Road, Tonbridge Kent TN9 1Sp UK.

Andreton, Craig. 2001. Audio Mastering. Wizoo Publishing GmbH, Bremen, Germany. Andreton, Craig. 2001. Home Studio.

Wizoo Publishing GmbH, Bremen, Germany. Steinberg.

1999. Lesson for Life. Product and Training Information.

CM32902 MAJOR STUDY V

Major study V is a 1 hour private instruction between the student and the lecturer once a week. This course provides students

with the latest playing and performing techniques, including vocal, that are currently practice by professional

instrumentalist/soloist in the music industry. Strong emphasis is given to the development of music reading and various techniques

relating music phrasing, articulation and dynamics. All students are assessed through weekly progress, mid - terms and final

exam. Students are required to sit for proficiency test for the major instruments through, either ABRSM, Australian Guild of

Examination or examination that are recognized by the Universiti Malaysia Sabah upon their graduation.

References

ABRSM. (1999). Scales and arpeggios for saxophone, grade 1-8,

Snidero, J. (1996). Jazz conception, Advance Music

Long, J. (1998). Classic blues, Wise Publications

Tayton, S. (1992). 100 + Solos for saxophone Wise Publications

Hejda, T. (1981). Jazz study, PWM

Davies, J., Harris, P. (1988). 80 graded studies for saxophone, book 2, Faber Music Ltd. Long, J. (1999). Jazz playalong for

Saxophone, Wise Publications

Waignein, A. (2000). Concertino, De Haske Publications BV.

Starr, Constance. 1992. Practical Piano Skills (5th editi.). USA: McGraw.

Tanner, Paul O. 1997. Jazz (8th.edit.). USA: McGraw. Ware,C. 1998. Basic of Vocal Pedagogy. USA: McGraw. Westphal, F. 1992

Guide to Teaching Woodwinds (5th edit.). USA: McGraw

Page 13: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

13

CM32702 CONDUCTING

This course trains students to work with musicians in a group, and they must be able to convey musical intentions to players by

means of gestures. It trains students to use physical parts of the body such as the eyes, the left and right hands as a means of

communication. Students will learn how to obtain artistic results by being able to communicate nuances in dynamics, phrasing,

articulation (legato & Staccato), and general expressions. They will also learn about the various ensembles they encounter and

how to work with them.

References

Green, Elizabeth A. H. 1997. The Modern Conductor, 6th ed. Prentice-Hall. Hunsberger, Donald. 1992. The Art of Conducting, 2nd

ed. McGraw-Hill, Inc.

Wittry, Diane. 2014. Baton Basics: Communicating Music through Gestures. Oxford University Press.

Dave Black, Tom Gerou. 2009. Alfred’s Essentials of Orchestration – A Practical Dictionary Alfred Publishing.

CM33302 ORCHESTRATION

Ochestration technique provides students with the various techniques for writing a full orchestra. This course will give students a

better understanding how various instruments interact with one another and the many possible combination of sounds to create

certain sound textures in the arrangment, characteristics of various instruments, range of instruments, proper notation and sound

of special effects. Students will learn four (4) elements that are important to an orchestration; economy, focus, variation and

balance.

References

Alfred Blatter (Drexel University) – Instrumentation/Orchestration. Schirmer Books, Division of Macmillan, Inc. New York. Don

Sebesky. The Contemporary Arranger (Revised Edition). Alfred Publishing Co. Inc. Henry Mancini. Sound and Scores. Northridge

Music, Inc.

Kent Kennan/ Donald Grantham -The Technique of Orchestration 3rd edition. Nicholas Rhimsky. Principal of Orchestration. Oxford

Univ. Press

CM33901 INSTRUMENTAL & VOCAL ENSEMBEL IV

This course provides students with the most up-to-date playing and performing techniques, including vocal, that are

currently practice by professional instrumentalist/soloist in the music industry. The music program consists of professional

musicians and music educators with many years of working experience in the music industry. Strong emphasis is given to the

development of music reading and various techniques relating music phrasing, articulation and dynamics. All students are

assessed through weekly progress and mid-terms and final exam.

References

Dornemann, J., 1992. Complete Preparation - A Guide to Auditioning for Opera. Excalibur Publishing. Agricola, J. F., 1995.

Introduction to the Art of Singing. Cambridge Uni. Press.

Ware, C., 1995. Adventures in Singing - A process for Exploring, Discovering and Developing Vocal Potential. McGraw Hill.

Brinson,, B. A. 1996. Choral Music. - Methods and Materials - Developing Successful Choral Programs. Schirmer Books. Bennett,

P.D., & Bartholomew , D. R. 1997. Singing in the Education of Children. Wadsworth Publishing Company . Collins, D.L., 1999.

Page 14: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

14

Teaching Choral Music. Prentice Hall.

Novak, E. A., 1988. Performing in Musicals. Schirmer Books.

Tower, M. G. , 1997. Choral Connection Level I Mixed Voices. McGraw Hill.

CM34102 ARRANGING FOR WIND ORCHESTRA

This course focuses on the arranging techniques for wind orchestra, mainly brass, saxophone and the woodwinds. The students

are able to understand the relationship between the different timbre of these instruments and the practical range for players to

play. An understanding of each character of the instrument is necessary before applying it in their music arrangement. Students

are introduce to the various musical forms found in music composition. Various arranging techniques such as rhythmic alteration,

melodic alteration, transposition, embellishment, syncopation and voicings will be covered in th is course.

References

Doezema, R. 1990. Arranging II. Boston: Berklee series publication.

Kennan, K. 1990. The Techniuqe of Orchestration. New Jersey: Prentise Hall. Nettles, Barrie. Harmony 1. Boston: Berklee series

publication.

Pople, A. 1994. Theory, Analysis and Meaning in Music. Great Britian: Cambridge University Press.

Ted, Pease. 1995. Arranging for Big Band and Score Analysis. Boston: Berklee series publication.

CM35103 PRE-GRADUATION RECITAL

Pre-Graduation Recital is a requisite for third year students’ preparation for their final recital. It involves solo performance of

pieces prepared during their fifth semester to ensure that the students, with the guidance of their lecturers, are well prepa red for

their final recital at semester six

References

ABRSM. (1999). Scales and arpeggios for saxophone, grade 1-8, Duro, S. (1999). Easy classic tunes, Chester Music Ltd.

Honey, P. (2000). No.1 Hits, Wise Publications Honey, P. (1999). Swing, Wise

Publications

Snidero, J. (1996). Jazz conception, Advance Music Long, J. (1998). Classic blues, Wise Publications Snieckowski, S. Wybor etiud

na oboj, book 2

Long, J. (1999). Jazz playalong for Saxophone, Wise Publications Waignein, A. (2000). Concertino, De

Haske Publications BV.

Blume, Jason., (1999). 6 Steps to Songwriting Success. New York; Watson-Guptill Publication. Nettles, Barrie. Harmony I.

Boston: Berklee Series Publication.

CM33002 MAJOR STUDY VI

Major Study VI is base on 1 hour individual lessons once a week. At the end of the semester the student should achieve the level

2 of Examination in UMS Music Programme. During the first semester of learning the clarinet the student should learn the basic

information regarding the instrument. All the information will be taught in low and middle registers of the instrument.

After finishing this course the student should know: how to hold the instrument, name all the parts of the instrument, name of the

notes and right fingering in low and middle register. The student must know how to play legato, staccato, changing registers,

Page 15: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

15

playing in regular rhythm. The students will also be thought to identify the pitch of the melody and rhythm, timing patterns,

tempo and dynamic on the base of simple melodies. On this base the student will be assessing throughout the course.

References

Lawton, S. (1989). The young saxophone player, Oxford University Press ABRSM. (1999). Scales and arpeggios for saxophone,

grade 1-8,

Duro, S. (1999). Easy classic tunes, Chester Music Ltd. Honey, P. (2000). No.1 Hits, Wise

Publications

Honey, P. (1999). Swing, Wise Publications

Snidero, J. (1996). Jazz conception, Advance Music Long, J. (1998). Classic blues, Wise

Publications Snieckowski, S. Wybor etiud na oboj, book 2

Kaplan, G. (1996). Sax for two, Houston Publishing, Inc. Tayton, S. (1992). 100 + Solos for saxophone Wise Publications

Berle, A. (1997). Everybody’s favorite saxophone method, Amsco Publications Hejda, T. (1981). Jazz study, PWM

Davies, J., Harris, P. (1988). 80 graded studies for saxophone, book 2, Faber Music Ltd. Long, J. (1998). Saxmania, Wise

Publications

Long, J. (1999). Jazz playalong for Saxophone, Wise Publications Waignein, A. (2000). Concertino, De Haske

Publications BV.

CM34002 AUDIO VISUAL DIGITAL TECHNOLOGY

Audio visual digital technology is a practical base course design to prepare students with the latest technology in the audio visual

industry. Students will cover the process of recording and editing using the current market software that is available. The course

will teach students how to produce video clips or documentaries using software that are found at the various studios at the School

of Arts. Besides the musical software, students will be able to learn and used other software such as Adobe Premiere, Digidesign

ProTools LE, MacroMedia Flash dan Adobe Photoshop.

References

Fawcett, N. 1994. Multimedia. Hodder Headline.

Persidsky, A. 2000. Premiere: For Macintosh & Window. Peachpit Press. Persidsky. A. 2000. Photoshop: For Macintosh & Window.

Peachpit Press. Sinclair, IR. 1991. Introduction to Digital Audio (2nd Edit.).

Watkinson, J. 1994. An Introduction to Digital Video. Focal Press.

CM33402 ARRANGING FOR POP ORCHESTRA

The course covers an advance techniques of music arranging especially for pop orchestra. These will cover the various orchestral

instruments such as the brass, saxophone, strings and rhythm section. Students are taught to write tutti writings, concerted,

voicing in seconds (clusters), voicing in fourths, upper structure triads & writing of foreground, middle ground a nd background

melodies. The course also requires students to score analysis of different arrangers and composers.

References

Doezema, R. 1990. Arranging II. Boston: Berklee series publication.

Kennan, K. 1990. The Techniuqe of Orchestration. New Jersey: Prentise Hall. Nettles, Barrie. Harmony 1. Boston: Berklee series

publication.

Pople, A. 1994. Theory, Analysis and Meaning in Music. Great Britian: Cambridge University Press.

Page 16: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

16

Ted, Pease. 1995. Arranging for Big Band and Score Analysis. Boston: Berklee series publication. Felts, Randy. 2002.

Reharmonization Techniques. Berklee Press. Boston, USA.

Boras, Tom. 2005. Jazz Composition and Arranging. Schirmer, USA

CM33602 INSTRUMENTAL & VOCAL ENSEMBLE VI

This course cover an advanced level of orchestral pieces and vocal singing technique for larger group (choir) with different vocal

ranges such as soprano, alto, tenor and bass. The students will be taught the different dynamic contrast, articulation and playing

as a group. Both the orchestra and vocal ensemble selection of pieces / songs are carefully selected or arrange by the faculty

members according to the playing abilities. Students are shown how to utilize time during rehearsal and presentation, the art of

basic conducting for the ensembles and proper performance ethics as well.

References

Dornemann, J., 1992. Complete Preparation - A Guide to Auditioning for Opera. Excalibur Publishing . Agricola, J. F., 1995.

Introduction to the Art of Singing. Cambridge Uni. Press.

Ware, C., 1995. Adventures in Singing - A process for Exploring, Discovering and Developing Vocal Potential. McGraw Hill.

Brinson,, B. A. 1996. Choral Music. - Methods and Materials - Developing Successful Choral Programs. Schirmer Books. Bennett,

P.D., & Bartholomew , D. R. 1997. Singing in the Education of Children. Wadsworth Publishing Company.

Collins, D.L., 1999. Teaching Choral Music. Prentice Hall. Novak, E. A., 1988. Performing in Musicals. Schirmer Books.

Tower, M. G. , 1997. Choral Connection Level I Mixed Voices. McGraw Hill.

CM35002 STUDIO RECORDING TECHNOLOGY APPLICATION II

This course prepare students with the knowledge and the techniques of recording audio using digital -based equipment in the

music recording industry. The students will be exposed to digital studio application such as the essential preparations, recording

audio signals, editing and mixing. The students will learned the functions of an equalizer and sound effects that a re commonly

used during recording. Students are given the opportunity to use the recording facilities such as the Pro Tools Digital Studios at

the School of Arts to produce recording projects or assignments.

References

Cunningham,M., (1996) Good Vibration. Penguin Castle Communications. Erne,M., (1998).

Digital Audio CD Resource Pack. Focal Press.

Huber &Runstein., (1997). Modern Recording Techniques (4th Edition). Focal Press.

Nisbett,A., (1997)., The Use of Microphones (4th Edition). Focal Press.

White,P., (1996). Recording and Production Techniques For the Recording Musician. London Sanctuary. Davis,G&Jones,R., (1990).

Sound Reinforcement Handbook (2nd Edition). Hal Leonard Corporation. Gibson,D., (1997). The Art of Mixing: A Visual Guide to

Recording, Engineering, and Production. Mix Books.

Page 17: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

17

COMMUNICATION PROGRAMME (HA02)

AK21403 DIGITAL PHOTO COMMUNICATION

This course introduces students to fundamental knowledge and skills requisite to producing photographs. This knowledge and skill

base includes the anatomy, function and use of the camera, plus basic processing, printing, a brief introduction to computer

technology and presentation information. Additionally, this course stresses the employment of photography as a means of

recording events, people or places (photojournalism) of interest and as a powerful tool of expression (art).

References

Helen Caple (2013). A Social Semiotic Approach. London: Palgrave Macmillan

Barbara London & Jim Stone. (2012) A short Course in Photography: An Introduction to Photographic Technique. 8th Edition. New

Jersey: Prentice Hall

Kenneth Kobre. (2008). Photojournalism The Professional Approach. Oxford: Focal Press

KenSmith, Sandra Moriarty, Gretchen Barbastic & Keith Kenney (Peny) (2005). Handbook of Visual Communication: Theory,

Methods and Media. NewYork, London: Routldge

Fred S. Parrish. (2002). Photojournalism: An Introduction. California: Wadsworth/Thomson Learnings

AK20103 INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY (NEW MEDIA IN COMMUNICATION)

This course aims to equip students with the knowledge and skills on consuming and development of contents related to new

media technologies. Each technology and its application shall be discussed from the critical and functional perspective withi n the

context of effective communication. Students will be given opportunities to design, develop and share new media contents and

apply the concept of - creative commons copyright; new media ethic and cyber security within the context of communication

fields.

References

David Benyon (2010). Designing Interactive Systems: A Comprehensive Guide to HCI and Interaction Design, Pearson

Education Canada.

Henry Jenkins (2008) Convergence Culture: Where Old and New Media Collide. New York University Press.

Mayer, RE (2005). The Cambridge handbook of multimedia learning. Cambridge University Press.

Rosenbaum, Steven (2011). Curation Nation: How to Win in a World Where Consumers are Creators. McGraw-Hill. Vivian, John

(2013). Media of Mass Communication (11th Edition). Pearson Education Inc

AK21103 PRINCIPLES OF PUBLIC RELATIONS

The course aims to introduce to students about public relations from its early practice to its current roles in contemporary

societies. This course serve as the foundation to the field of public relations by discussing topics such as history of publi c

relations, theories, principles, strategic planning, management practice as well as career in public relations.

References

Wilcox, D.L. & Cameron, G.T. (2012). Public Relations Strategies and Tactics. 10th ed. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

L’Etang, J. (2008). Public Relations: Concepts, Practice and Critique. London: SAGE Butterick, K. (2011). Introducing Public

Page 18: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

18

Relations: Theory and Practice. London: SAGE

Theaker, A. & Yaxley, H. (2013). The Public Relations Strategic Toolkit: An Essential Guide To Successful Public Relations

Practice. London: Routledge

Heath, R.L. (ed) (2010).The SAGE Handbook of Public Relations. California: SAGE

AK20203 COMMUNICATION LAW & ETHICS

This course aim is to introduce communication laws and ethics to the student. This includes analyses of the communication legal

and ethical issues with respect to the media industry in the Malaysian context. The course will discuss the legal system in Malaysia

particularly in regards to laws that regulate the media, and journalism ethics in Malaysia. Since there is decisi on- making with

public interest nowadays seen takes place outside of formal legal structures, the course includes within its purview: principles that

should or do underlie laws and regulations, awareness for existing and new laws and regulations, and the debates over press

freedom practices through which policy is implemented.

References

Leslie, L.Z. 2007. Mass Communication Ethics: Decision Making In Postmodern Culture. New York: Allyn & bacon. Lee Mei Pheng.

2007. General Principles of Malaysian Law (5th Ed.). Penerbit Fajar Bakti Sdn. Bhd.

McNae, L.C.J. 1991. Undang-undang Penting Untuk Wartawan. (terje. Mohd Safar Hasim). Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa

dan Pustaka.

Mohd Safar Hasim. 2012. Akhbar dan Kuasa: perkembangan sistem akhbar di Malaysia sejak 1806. Kuala Lumpur:

Penerbitan Universiti Malaya.

Mohd Safar Hasim. 2002. Mengenali Undang-undang Media dan Siber. Kuala Lumpur: Utusan Publications & Distributors.

Perlembagaan Persekutuan (Perkara 10; Perkara 63; Perkara 63.3; Perkara 126 Bahagian 9 Perhakiman; Perkara 149; Perkara

150; )

AK10103 COMMUNICATION FOUNDATION

The course was design to expose students to understand and to explore the communication process to build a strong foundation

in communication study. It will start with communication definitions, basic elements of communication, functions of

communication, and basic communication models. Brief history of communication study and the evolutions of media development

will be discussed. This will be followed by different type of communication that covered intra & interpersonal communication,

verbal & nonverbal communication, and small & big group communication. Students will also be introduced to the communication

disciplines such as journalism, broadcasting and public relations emphasizing on its basic roles and power. Complexity in dealing

with issues, audience and media organizations will also be touch.

References

Albertazzi, D., & Cobley, P. (eds.). 2013. The Media: An Introduction (3rd Ed.). Hoboken : Taylor and Francis.

Baran, S., 2014. Introduction to Mass Communications: Media Literacy and Culture (8th Edition). McGraw-Hill.

Crowley, D. J., & Heyer, P.. 2016. Communication in History: Technology, Culture, Society (6th Ed.). Abingdon [England]:

Routledge.

DeVito, J. A. 2006. Human Communication (2nd Ed.). Boston, MA : Pearson Custom Pub.

McQuail, D. & Windahl, S. 2016. Communication Models: For The Study of Mass Communication (2nd Edition). London :

Routledge.

Page 19: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

19

AK10303 MEDIA, CULTURE & SOCIETY

This course discusses the structure and content of the media as well as what impacts it has the individuals, organisations, society

and culture. It also examines the social, economic and political aspects of the media which impinge on its processes, structures

and contents. Students will also be introduced to the mass media and media practices within and outside Malaysia including their

roles and modus operandi. Students are encouraged, through tutorials and presentations, to discuss media freedom and social

responsibilities of the journalists and the media they are affiliated to.

References

Croteau, D. and Hoynes, W. (2003). Media/Society: Industries, Images, and Audiences (3rd edition. California: Pine Forge

Press.

Dominick, J.R. (2004). The Dynamics of Mass Communication: Media in the Digital Age (8th edition). New York: McGraw-Hill. Erni,

J.N. & Siew Keng Chua (Eds). (2005). Asian Media Studies: Politics of Subjectivities. John Wiley & Son.

Gunter, R. & Mughan, A. (Eds). (2000). Democracy and the Media: A Comparative Perspective. Ohio: Cambridge University

Press.

Hanson, Ralph. E. (2011). Mass Communication: Living in a Media World (3rd edition). Washinghton: CQ Press.

AK10203 I N T R O D U C T I O N T O COMMUNICATION THEORIES

This course is designed to give students the understanding of fundamental knowledge of communication theories. It begins with

topics focussed on the basic elements of communication. The course refreshes knowledge about the fields of communication and

introduces theories on and related to communication and how these theories are clustered. Students will be guided to comprehend

theories applicable in journalism, broadcasting, advertising and public relation.

References

Caldwell, J. T. (2000). Theories of The New Media: A Historical Perspective. London: The Athlone Press

Littlejohn, S. J. (2005). Theories of Human Communication (8th edition). Boston: Wadsworth Publishing Company. McQuail, D.

(2000). Mass Communication Theory (4th edition). London: SAGE Publications.

Miller, K. (2005). Communication Theories: Perspectives, Theories, and Contexts (2nd edition). Boston: McGraw-Hill Cos. West, R.

& Turner (L.H. 2007). Introducing Communication Theory: Analysis and Application (3rd Edition). Boston: Pearson

Edu. Inc.

AK21303 INTRODUCTION TO ADVERTISING (PRINCIPLES OF ADVERTISING)

This course is designed to introduce to the students about wide consumer’s advertising, promotional activities and dynamic

function in integrated marketing communication (MARCOM) and marketing process.

References

Arens, W.F., Schaefer, D. & Weigold, M.F. (2009). Essential of Contemporary Advertising. 2nd ed. Florida: McGraw-Hill. Arens,

W.F., Weigold, M.F. & Arens, C. (2009). Contemporary Advertising. 12th ed. Florida: McGraw-Hill.

Belch, G.E. & Belch, M.A. (2009). Advertising and Promotion: An Integrated Marketing Communication Perspective. 8th ed.

San Diego: McGraw-Hill.

Spence, E. & Heekeren, B.V. (2005), Advertising Ethics. New York: Prentice Hall.

Page 20: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

20

Vollmer, C., Hamilton, B.A. & Precourt, G. (2008). Always On: Advertising, Marketing and Media in An Era of Consumer

Control. 1st ed. Florida: McGraw-Hill.

AK21703 NEWS GATHERING AND REPORTING

News reporting is essential in understanding the process of news writing. This course also helps student to understand how to

gather information and report those information into news form in newsroom. In addition, students will also learn how to write

news for various types of field. Finally, students learn to work as journalist independently as well as in a team, as i n a true

situation in the field of journalism.

References

Bodker, H & Neverla, Irene (eds) (2016). Environmental Journalism. Park Square: Routledge Rich, C (2015) Writing and Reporting

News : A Coaching Method. Boston, MA :Cengage Learning Harcup, T (2015). Journalism : Principles and Practice. London : Sage

Publication

Andrews, P (2014). Sports Journalism. A Practical Introduction, London: Sage Publication

Hill, S & Lashmar, P (2014). Online Journalism. Los Angeles: Sage Publication

AK21003 COMMUNICATION AND MARKETING STRATEGY

Communication and Marketing Strategy offers a holistic understanding of the integrated role of advertising, marketing and public

relations in the promotion of products, ideas, services and ideologies. The course interrogates the conventional 4Ps (price,

product, place, promotion) from the lens of Integrated Marketing Communication (IMC). The central role of communication in the

marketing process is discussed at length. Communication and global cultural strategies such as hybridization, customization and

glocalisation deployed by multinational corporations (MNCs) in the advancement of goods, services and ideas for an increasingly

global mass market are addressed in the course.

References

Percy, L. (2008). Strategic Integrated Marketing Communications. London: Butterworth Heinemann. Tuckwell, J.K. (2007).

Integrated Marketing Communications, 2nd. Ed. Toronto: Pearson Education Canada. Parag Diwan. (2007). Communica- tion

Management. Kuala Lumpur: Golden Books Centre.

Moss, G. ( 2007). Secret Of Persuasion. Singapore: Thomson Learning.

Bacharach, B.S. (2006). Get Them On Your Side. Petaling Jaya, Selangor: Advantage Quest.

AK20903 EDITING

This course was designed as a component to the whole comprehensive training to do news editing. By taking this course, students

would have a more holistic training in this field where editing is an essential part of being a journalist. The abil ity to write news is

incomplete without any understanding and skill in editing. Students will be train basic principles of news editing whether it is news,

features, pictures as well as to deal with ethical issues.

References

Pagel, Larry G (2006) Proofreading and editing precision, Australia: Thomson/South-Western

Stepp, C.S (2008) Editing for Today’s Newsroom. A guide for success in a changing profession, 2nd edition, New York & London:

Page 21: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

21

Routledge

Bowles, Dorothy A & Diane L.Borden (2010) Creative Editing, 6th Edition. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth

Brooks, Brian S & James L.Pinson (2013) The Art of Editing. In the Age of Convergence, Boston : Pearson

Tim Harrower, Julie Elman (2012) The Newspaper Designer’s Handbook, 7th Edition, New York: McGraw-Hill Education

AK20603 RESEARCH METHODS IN COMMUNICATION

The aim of this course is to equip students with the knowledge and skills in undertaking qualitative and quantitative methods

research in communication studies. The course is expected to enhance the ability of the students to identify research problems,

conduct literature reviews, using appropriate research methods, undertake data analysis, compile bibliography, comprehend

importance of ethical responsibilities and present its findings. Students will be given opportunities to design an d implement

research projects, to analyze data and to report results in scholarly research format.

References

Alan Bryman (2012). Social Research Methods 4th Edition. Oxford University Press.

Chua Yan Piaw. 2006. Kaedah dan statistik penyelidikan: Kaedah penyelidikan. McGraw Hill: Kuala Lumpur. Cresswell, J.W., Plano

Clark, V.L. (2007). Designing and Conducting Mixed Methods Research.USA SAGE.

Mukesh Kumar, Salim Abdul Talib & T. Ramayah (2013). Business Research Methods. Oxford University Press

Treadwell, D. (2014). Introducing Communication Research, Paths to Inquiry.

2nd Ed. California:SAGE

AK20503 FEATURE WRITING

This course will introduce basic guideline in writing features whether in newspapers or magazines. Students will be exposed to

various non-fiction writing techniques apart from learning ethical issues and legal implications of writing features.

References

Pape, S & Featherstone, S (2014). Feature Writing: A Practical Introduction. London: Sage Publication

Sumner, D.E & Holly G.Miller (2013) Feature & Magazine Writing: Action , Angle & Anecdotes, Malden, MA : Wiley-Blackwell

Benson, C.D & Whitaker, C.F (2014). Magazine Writing. New York: Routledge

Navarsky, V & Cornog, E (2012) The Art of Making Magazines. New York:Columbia Press

Morrish, J & Bradshaw, P (2012) Magazine Editing In Print and Online. Milton Park: Routledge

AK21203 PUBLIC RELATIONS WRITING

The course aims to expose students to the culture of writing in public relations profession. Emphasis will be given on acquiring the

writing skills for various material aims at different audiences using multiple mediums. Students are expected to spend more time in

sharpening the required writing skills of a public relations practitioner.

References

Foster, J. 2005. Effective Writing Skills for Public Relations. 3rd ed. London. Kogan Page

Newsom, D. & Haynes, J. 2008. Public Relations Writing: Form and Style, 8th ed. California. Thomson Wadsworth

Page 22: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

22

Smith, R.D. 2003. Becoming a Public Relations Writer: A Writing Workbook for the Profession. 2nd ed. New Jersey. Lawrence

Erlbaum

AK21503 CAMPAIGN & PERSUASION

This course provides knowledge and skills related to campaign and persuasion. These two corpuses of communication skills will be

taught as an approach to solve issues amidts of the society. Students are principally guided to i dentify the types and objectives of

particular campaigns which were commonly organized by government, non-governmental bodies and corporate organisations.

Students will also be technically exposed to the ways of planning and executing conventional campaign by applying particular

persuasion techniques.

References

Atkins, C.K. & Rice, R.E. (2013). Advances in public communication campaigns. Dalam Scharrer, E. (Ed.), The international

encyclopedia of media studies: Vol. 5: Media effects/Media psychology (pp. 526-551). London, United Kingdom: wiley- Blackwell.

O’Keefe, S. (2002). Complete guide to internet publicity. New York: John Wiley

Syahruddin Awang Ahmad. (2010). Kempen dan pembujukan. Kota Kinabalu, Sabah: Penerbit UMS

Uhrig, J., Bann, C., Williams, P., & Evans, W.D. (2010). Social networking web sites as a platform for disseminating social

marketing interventions: an exploratory pilot study. Social marketing Quarterly, 16, 2-20

AK21603 MEDIA PLANNING

This course introduces students to the concept of communication (media planning) in general and the concept of marketing

communications practice. This course is designed specifically to provide a clear picture to the students about media planning

functions and how it is applied as an essential element in the marketing strategy of a product or service.

References

Percy, L. (2008). Strategic Integrated Marketing Communications. London: Butterworth Heinemann.

Terence A. Shimp and J. Craig Andrews (2013). Advertising, Promotion, and Other Aspects of Integrated Marketing

Communications, 9th. Ed. South-Western Engaged Learning. United States of America

Tuckwell, J.K. (2007). Integrated Marketing Communications, 2nd. Ed. Toronto: Pearson Education Canada

Parag Diwan. (2007). Communication Management. Kuala Lumpur: Golden Books Centre.

Moss, G. (2007). Secret Of Persuasion. Singapore: Thomson Learning

AK30103 COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT

Management Communication introduces students to the role of communication in the strategic management of corporate, public

and NGO organisations. The course examines managerial power in the construction and flow of communication within an

organisation. Students engage with the notion of organisational culture and interrogate organisational discourses and narratives in

class exercises. Students are offered an understanding of the role of new media in employee relations and in the construction and

management of organisational image.

References

Argenti, A.P. & Forman, J. (2002). The Power of Corporate Communication. New York: McGraw-Hill Munter, M. (2002). Guide to

Page 23: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

23

Managerial Communication. 6th ed. New York: Prentice Hall

Boone, M.E. (2001). Managing interactively. New York: McGraw-Hill

Clampitt, P. (2001). Communicating for Managerial Effectiveness. California: SAGE Publications Hynes, G.E. (2001).

Managerial Communicating: Strategies and Applications. New York: McGraw-Hill

AK20703 RADIO PRODUCTION I

This is an introductory course for students exploring radio production. This course will emphasize the techniques of radio

interview, script writing, news reporting, and news reading and live on air presentation and production. The roles and

responsibilities of a radio producer are also highlighted as well as criteria to be a creative and productive radio producer.

References

Hausman, Carl, Benoit, Philip and O’ Donnell, Lewis B. 2000. Radio Production: Production, Programming and Performance

(5th Ed.). California: Wadsworth

Hilliard, Robert L. 2000. Writing for Television, Radio, and New Media. California:Wadsworth.

Cohler, Devid Keith. 1994. Broadcast Journalism: A Guide For The Presentation of Radio and Televesion News. New Jersey:

Pentice Hall.

Robert McLeish. 2002. Radio Production: A Manual for Broadcasters. New York: Focal Press Limited.

Michael H. Adams & Kimberly. Massey. 1995. Introduction to Radio. USA: Brown & Benchmark

AK20803 RADIO PRODUCTION 2

This course provides students’ understanding of the roles of an advanced radio producer. This course will emphasize the

techniques radio magazines, documentaries/features and radio drama/sketch production. Script writing and presentation is also

highlighted as well as the usage of music and sound effect as an effective and creative element in recorded radio production

programme.

References

Hausman, Carl, Benoit, Philip and O’ Donnell, Lewis B. 2000. Radio Production: Production, Programming and Performance

(5th Ed.). California: Wadsworth

Denis McQuail. 1997. Audience Analysis. London: Sage Publications. .

Tim Crook. 1999. Radio Drama Theory and Practice. London: Routledge.

Khadijah Hashim. 2000. Panduan Menulis Skrip Drama Radio. Pulau Pinang:’K’ Publishing Sdn. Bhd.

Robert McLeish. 2002. Radio Production: A Manual for Broadcasters. New York: Focal Press Limited

AK30203 INTERNSHIP

Internship is a compulsory component of the programme, designed to expose students to the professional practice of

communication and equip them with the necessary skills for professional practice. All professional bodies and associations in media

and communication require communication majors to fulfil an internship programme prior to graduation in order to be accepted

into the fraternity of practitioners. The internship programme is expected to provide hands-on experience to students specialising

in journalism broadcasting, public relations and advertising. Students spend eight-ten weeks in the media industry or

communication related sectors under the supervision of a professional practitioner and are then evaluated on their practical skills

Page 24: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

24

as well as their ability to relate internship experience to key concepts, methods and theories.

AK30103 PHILOSOPHY OF COMMUNICATION

Philosophy of Communication introduces students to a range of social theories relevant to communication studies through an

analysis of classic ideas and works in the social sciences and humanities. Students examine the overarching influence of social

thought on the development of microtheories in communication studies. Students analyse various paradigmatic perspectives such

as positivism, functionalism, critical political economy and critical cultural studies while focusing on oriental and occidental views

relating to cultural forms, representations and production. The course offers historical, ideological, moral and ethical reasoning of

(media) systems and practices enabling students to critically deconstruct local discourses and images in an increasingly mediatized

global environment.

References

Mosco, V. (2009) The Political Economy of Communication. 2nd Ed. London: Sage. Habermas, J. (1984) The Theory of

Communicative Action. Vol. 1. Boston: Beacon Press.

Habermas, J. (1989) The Structural Transformation of the Public Sphere: an Inquiry into a Category of Bourgeois Society.

Cambridge: MIT Press.

Thompson. J.B. (1995) Ideology in Modern Culture: Critical Social theory and the Era of Mass Communication. Stanford, CA:

Stanford University Press.

Said, Edward. (1979) Orientalism. New York: Vintage Books. Bocock, R. (1986) Hegemony. Milton Keynes: Open University

Boyd-Barrett, O. (Ed.) (2007) Communications Media, Globalisation and Empire. Eastleigh: UK Bloomington.

AK31103 CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR

Consumer Behaviour offers students an inter-disciplinary perspective of the relationship between mass production and mass

consumption in an increasingly global marketplace. The course examines the role of mass media and new media technology in the

cultivation of purchasing habits. The growth of mega shopping malls and plastic card addiction in the context of a developing

society, is examined in this course. The course focuses on tactics, schemes and techniques deployed by marketers in the

promotion and sale of products and services and the methods of researching, monitoring and manipulating consumer behaviour

for corporate gains in a capitalist system. Students discuss as well the role of the consumer association and consumer rights

regulatory agencies in monitoring deceptive advertising and protecting the rights of consumers in Malaysia.

References

Bagozzi, R.P., Gurhan-Canli, Z. & Priestir, R. (2002). The Social Psychology of Consumer Behaviour. Buckingham: Open

University Press

Solomon, M.R. (2002). Consumer Behavior: Buying, Having and Being. 5th ed. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall

Peter, J.P. & Olson, J.C. (1999). Consumer Behavior and Marketing Strategy. Boston: McGraw-Hill

Mohd. Hamdan Adnan. (1990). Ilmu Pengguna. Shah Alam: Biroteks ITM

Schultz, D.E. & Tannenbaum, S.I. (1997). Keperluan Strategi Pengiklanan. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka

AK30303 TV PRODUCTION

TV Production is designed specially to provide students with practical skills in the production of TV programmes. Students are

Page 25: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

25

offered extensive experience in handling and managing digital equipment. Practical skills in shooting, lighting, sound record-ing,

set design and editing are including in the process of learning to produce a programme for TV. Students engage in the actual

production of a programme for TV viewing through group work.

References

Abercrombie, N. (1997). Television and Society. Cambridge: Polity Press.

Compesi, R.J & Sheriff, R.E. (1997). Video: Field Print and Editing. Bosru: Allyn and Bacon.

French, D. & Richards, M. (1996). Contemporary Television: Eastern Perspectives. New Delhi: Sage Publication. Karthigesu, R.

(1994). Sejarah Perkembangan Televisyen di Malaysia (1963-83). Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Hausman, C. & Palombo, P.J. (1993). Modern Video Production: Tools, techniques, Applications. New York: Harper Collins

College Publishers.

AK30803 COMPARATIVE JOURNALISM

This course is the sociology of news and journalism for majoring students. Due to the complex and multi-disciplinary nature of this

course, this course is designed to expose students to various journalism models and make comparison in terms of practice and

principles. Students are also exposed to the Western journalism practice due to the Libertarian press system in comparison to

Asian journalistic practice based on the Asian development media system.

References

Muobike, Omanwa (2016). Development Journalism: The Role of Journalists in National Development. Lambert Academic

Publishing

Youngblood, S (2016) Peace Journalism Principles and Practices: Responsibly Reporting Conflicts, Reconciliation, and

Solutions. New York & London : Routledge

Berglez, P (2013) Global Journalism. Theory and Practice. New York: Peter Lang

McQuail, D (2013). Journalism and Society. London: Sage Publication

Harcup, T (2012). Alternative Journalism, Alternative Voices. Milton Park: Routledge

Wang, G (ed) (2011) De-Westernizing Communication Research. London & New York: Routledge

AK30603 STATION MANAGEMENT (BROADCAST MANAGEMENT)

This course provides a basic knowledge of managing a broadcasting station. It will include the principles of management,

leadership, decision making, broadcasting technique, broadcasting system, broadcasting management, programme strategy and

programme promotion. Management of commercial broadcasting station will also be discussed in relation with nation building.

References

Chuck Williams. 2002. Effective Management a Multimedia Approach. USA: South Western Thomson Learning.

P.C. Tripathi ; P.N. Reddy. 2007. Principles of Management (third Edition).New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company

Limited.

Ingram. 2004. Sale Managing-Analysis and Decision Making. USA:Thomson South Western. Mitchell Leslie. 2009. Production

Management for Television. USA:Routledge.

Morissan, MA. 2011. Manajemen Media Penyiaran: Strategi Mengelola Radio & Televisi Jakarta :Kencana Prenada Media

Group

Page 26: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

26

AK31306 ACADEMIC EXERCISE

Research Exercise is a required two-semester, year-long academic exercise to be undertaken by students in the final year of the

undergraduate degree programme. Students develop a research proposal on a topic of interest and are assigned a supervisor in

the beginning of the first enrolled semester. Students are expected to work independently in producing an empirical research

report of 9000-10000 words. The project requires students to pose questions and engage critically with communication policy,

discourses and practices through rigorous literature review and empirical work. Reports submitted for examination at the end of

the second semester must meet academic protocol and the APA style of referencing.

AK31203 CORPORATE PUBLIC RELATIONS

The course aims to expose students on the needs of corporate public relations to organizations. The course will discuss how the

elements of internal and external communication affecting the practice of corporate public relations. The implication of technology

to the practice of corporate public relations particularly in managing communication crisis, corporate social responsibility as well as

pressure from activism will be discussed as well.

References

Agrenti, P.A (2009) Corporate Communication. 5th edition. Boston: McGraw-Hill Companies

Agrenti, PA (2007) Strategic Corporate Communication. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited. Cornelissen, J.

P. (2004). Corporate Communication: Theory and Practice. London: Sage Publication.

Dan L., Otis B., Suzette T. H., dan Elizabeth L.T. (2007). Public Relations: The Profession and the Practice. International

Edition. Mc Graw Hill. New York,

Michael B. Goodman and Peter B. Hirsch (2012). Corporate Communication: Tactical Guidelines for Strategic Practice. Business

Expert Press, LLC. New York, USA.

AK31403 GOVERNMENT PUBLIC RELATIONS

Government Public Relations examines the practice of public diplomacy and the role of communication in sustaining political

power. Students are introduced to a range of strategies deployed by government agencies in building their image and winning

public support towards the implementation of nation-building policies and projects such as 1Malaysia, New Development Policy,

New Economic Model, Education Policy, Malaysian Developmental Plans etc. The role of the Ministry of Information,

Communication and Culture and its related agencies are explored in this subject. Students are informed of the role of change

agents, opinion leaders and interpersonal elements in the process of implementing state designed change projects. The role of

new media technology, such as mobile, satellite and the Internet, is explored.

References

Parag Diwan. (2007). Communication Management. Kuala Lumpur: Golden Books Centre. Moss, G. (2007). Secret of Persuasion.

Singapore: Thomson Learning.

Bacharach, B.S. (2006). Get Them On Your Side. Petaling Jaya, Selangor: Advantage Quest.

Nazaruddin Hj. Mohd. Jali, Ma’rof Redzuan, Asnarulkiaadi Abu Samah & Ismail Hj. Mohd. Rashid. (2004). Pengajian

Malaysia: Kenegaraan Dan Kewarganegaraan, ed. Kedua. Petaling Jaya, Selangor: Prentice Hall.

Jamieson, H.K. & Waldman, P. (2003). The Press Effect: Politicians, Journalists, And The Stories That Shape The Political

World. Madison Avenue, New York: Oxford University Press.

Page 27: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

27

AK31603 PUBLIC RELATIONS CONSULTANCY PROJECT

This course taught students about public relations counselling projects. It should be helpful for students to choose the best

method to be used for counselling in public relations especially in term of building good relationship between organisation and its

publics. Students will also be trained to work in a team as it will help them to solve problems collectively as well as to achieve

objectives of their projects. The interpersonal communication skills, media relations and issues management are become part of

the public relations skills which will be taught in this course for the whole semester.

References

Bobbitt, R. & Sullivan, R. (2008). Developing the public relations campaign: a team-based approach 2nd ed. Upper Saddle- River,

New Jersey, USA: Pearson.

Lattimore, D., Baskin, O., Heiman, S. & Toth, E. (2011). Public relations: the profession and the Practice. New York: McGraw-

Hill

Ogden, J. & Laurie, J.W. (2012). Strategic communications planning for effective public relations and marketing. Dubuque,

Iowa, USA: Kendall Hunt Publishing

Wilcox, L.D., Cameron, T.G., Reber, H.B. & Jae-Hwa Shin. (2012). THINK public relations, 2nd ed. Upper

Saddle-River, New Jersey, USA: Pearson

AK31703 COMMUNICATION AND MARKETING STRATEGY

This course will examine the theory and techniques applicable to all the major marketing communication functions such as

advertising, direct marketing, sales promotions, public relations and personal selling. It will provide a knowle dge base that will

allow students to research and evaluate a company’s marketing and promotional situation and use this information in developing

effective communication strategies and programs.

References

Clow E.K. & Baack, D. (2012). Integrated Advertising, promotion and marketing communications, 5th Ed. Harlow, England :

Pearson Hall.

Fill, Chris, Hughes, Francesco, Scott. (2013). Advertising, strategy, creativity and media. Harlow, England : Pearson Hall. Fill, C.

(2011). Essentials of Marketing and Communication. Harlow, England : Pearson- Hall.

Holm, O. (2006). Integrated marketing communication: from tactics to strategy. Corporate Communications: An International

Journal, 1 (1,): 23 -33

AK30703 RESEARCH IN PUBLIC RELATIONS

Research in Public Relations introduces a scientific approach to the design and implementation of public and commercial

information and communication programmes and campaigns. It invites students to critically examine various forms of

narratives, discourses, symbols and images constructed by commercial, political and non-government bodies to influence public

opinion and behaviour. The course focuses on situation analysis, and research methods and techniques deployed in the summative

and formative stages of a communication project. It provides students hands-on experience in conducting small-scale studies of

campaign effectiveness, market research and opinion polls.

Page 28: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

28

References

Stacks, D.W. (2002). Primer of Public Relations Research. New York: The Guilford Press

Syed Arabi Idid. (1998). Kaedah Penyelidikan Komunikasi dan Sains Sosial. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka

Tourangeau, R., Rips, L.J., & Rasinski, K. (2000). The Psychology of Survey Response. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Ferguson, S.D. (2000). Researching The Public Opinion Environment: Theories and Methods. California. SAGE Publications

Kumar, R. (2014). Research Methodology: A step-by-step guide for beginners. Los Angeles: Sage Publication

AK30403 TV DIRECTING

TV Directing introduces students to various forms and genres of TV and film production and engages them with the principles,

methods and techniques of directing a television programme with special focus on news and current affairs, drama and

documentary. The course also emphasizes the need for reception studies and audience participation strategies in the directing

and production process. Students are provided hands-on experience with production materials and equipment such as

cameras, light and sound. Practical skills in shooting, lighting, sound recording, set design and editing are incorporated in the

course. Students are guided through different stages of TV directing procedures such as pre-production, production and

post-production.

References

Kingdom, T. (2004). Total Directing: Integrating Camera and Performance in Film and Television. New York: Silman-James Press

Rabigar, M. (2003). Directing: Film Techniques and Aesthetics. 3rd ed. California: Focal Press

Miller, T. (2002). Television Studies. London: British Film Institute

Cury, I. (2001). Directing and Producting for Television: A Format Appoarch. 2nd ed. California: Focal Press

Rose, B.G. (1999). Directing for Television. USA: Roman and little field

AK30903 CASE STUDIES IN PUBLIC RELATIONS & ADVERTISING

This is an intermediate level course which will practically help student to foresee issues and crises in public relations as well as

advertising field of interest. The content for weekly topics in lectures and tutorials are fully driven by issues and cris es which were

literally occurred in the real world. Students will be taught on how to manage resources, organizing team and to implement good

public relations or advertising action plan purposely to solve such problems. Cases in public relations and advertising are reflected

by mass media, audiences, publics, stakeholders, economic fluctuations, political events, social factors and so on. The effects of

these variables will be assessed and from both public relations and advertising perspective s as it’s will relatively affect both field

in term of professionalism and practices.

References

Atkins, C.K. & Rice, R.E. (2013). Advances in public communication campaigns. Dalam Scharrer, E. (Ed.), The international

encyclopedia of media studies: Vol. 5: Media effects/Media psychology (pp. 526-551). London, United Kingdom: wiley- Blackwell.

O’Keefe, S. (2002). Complete guide to internet publicity. New York: John Wiley

Syahruddin Awang Ahmad. (2010). Kempen dan pembujukan. Kota Kinabalu, Sabah: Penerbit UMS

Uhrig, J., Bann, C., Williams, P., & Evans, W.D. (2010). Social networking web sites as a platform for disseminating social

marketing interventions: an exploratory pilot study. Social marketing Quarterly, 16, 2-20

Page 29: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

29

AK30503 ELECTRONIC NEWS GATHERING

This course introduces students to various news gathering and presentation for TV production. The knowledge and approaches is

to hence their skill of production in communication that practices in Malaysia Media. Students introduced to the field work of news

gathering in a video recording.

This course aims to:

Students enable to be a professional news producer for electronic media.

Students enable to perform the responsibility and the nature of news electronic production (TV). Develop knowledge of writing

skills, creativity for media production.

Page 30: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

30

INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS PROGRAMME (HA12)

AH10103 INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

The aim of this course is to introduce the basic concept of industrial relations system, theories in industrial relations, trade unions,

employers and new pattern of working style. The course will begin with some main theories in the area of industrial relations.

There are Dunlop system theory, Marxist perspective, Pluralism and Unitarism perspective which students must understand before

they explore further into the field of industrial relations. In the 1980s, the emergence of human resources management left a

strong impact on industrial relations. Therefore students should understand the concept of industrial relations and its application in

today’s world of globalization.

References

Akta Perhubungan Perusahaan 1967. Kuala Lumpur: Jabatan Percetakan Negara. Blyton,

Amossé, T., Bryson, A., Forth, J., & Petit, H. (2016). Comparative workplace employment relations: an analysis of practice in

Britain and France. London: Palgrave Macmillan.

Choonara, J. (2019). Insecurity, Precarious Work and Labour Markets: Challenging the Orthodoxy. Switzerland: Palgrave

Macmillan.

Gall, G. (2017). Employment Relations in Financial Services. Employment Relations in Financial Services.

https://doi.org/10.1057/978-1-137-39539-9.

Gerrard, J. (2019). Precarious Enterprise on the Margins: Work, Poverty, and Homelessness in the City (Vol. 53). Australia:

Palgrave Macmillan.

Maimunah, A. (2016). Malaysian industrial relations and employment law (9th ed.). McGraw-Hill Education.

Malik, A. (2019). Strategic Human Resource Management and Employment Relations: An International Perspective. Springer.

Singapore: Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd.

Nachmias, S., & Caven, V. (2019). Inequality and organizational practice. Volume II, Employment relations (Vol. II). London:

Palgrave Macmillan.

P. & Turnbull, B. (2000). The Dynamics of Employee Relations. London: Macmillan Blyton, P., Bacon, N. Fiorito, J. & Heery, E.

(2008). Sage Handbook of Industrial Relations.

Deery, D.P. & Plowman, W.J. (2001). Industrial Relations: A Contemporary Analysis. 2nd ed. Australia: McGraw-Hill Edwards, P.K.

(2003). Industrial Relations: Theory and Practice in Britain. Oxford: Blackwell

Ordinan Buruh Sabah. (Sabah CAP.67) Ammended as at 10.02.2005 by Act A1238). Sabah : Kelab Kebajikan dan

Sosial,Jabatan Tenaga Kerja Sabah (KESERU)

Pettinger, R. (2000). The Future of Industrial Relations. London: Continuum

Rose, E. (2004). Employment Relations. England: FT Financial Times

Salamon, M. (2003). Industrial Relations: Theory and Practice. London: FT Financial Times

Sarma, A. M. (2015). Industrial relations : Conceptual and legal framework. Himalaya Publishing House.

AH10203 LABOUR HISTORY IN MALAYSIA

The aim of this course is to introduce the basic concept of the history and movement of labour struggle in Malaysia. Malaysian

labour history i s an important element that led to the policy change related to industrial relations.

References

Anantaraman, V. (1997). Malaysian Industrial Relations: Law and Practice. Kuala Lumpur: Universiti Putra Malaysia Press

Page 31: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

31

Gamba, C. (1967). The Origins of Trade Unionsm in Malaya. Singapore: Donald Moore Press

Kamarudin Said. (1978). Corak Perhubungan Perindustrian di Malaysia. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka

Leong, Yee Fong. (1999). Labour and Trade Unionism in Colonial Malaya: A Study of the Socio-economic and Political Bases of the

Malayan Labour Movement, 1930-1957. Pulau Pinang: Universiti Sains Malaysia

Rohana Ariffin. (1997). Women and Trade Unions in Peninsular Malaysia with Special Reference to MTUC and

Cuepecs.Pulau Pinang: Universiti Sains Malaysia

Sarma, A. M. (2015). Industrial relations : Conceptual and legal framework. Himalaya Publishing House.

AH20103 ORGANIZATIONAL COMMUNICATION

This course tries to expose student to the functions of communication in determining the development and the excellence in an

organization. The study will be on observation and understanding how man communicates using words, symbols and action which

could increase the organization’s daily activities. To understand how and why individuals behave in certain manners, one should

know in what ways individuals could interact better for the success of the organization. The aim of this course is to expose

students to the theoretical and practical aspects in communication i.e on how people communicate among themselves.

Communication is an important aspect in an organization. Therefore, a study on organizational communication could

accommodate basic understandings. Whereby each process in communication is usually connected with human relations, for

examples conflicts, ethics, functions, rules, cultures, networks, varieties, leadership, creativity and technology. Through this

course, students will be introduced to theories and the pragmatic relations in various types of organizational communications.

References

Cheney, G. et. al. (2003). Organizational Communication in an Age of Globalization: Issues, Reflections and Practices. Illinois:

Waveland Press

Dennis K.Mumby,Timothy R.Kuhn.(2019) Organization Communication.(2019).US.Sage Publication.

Eisenberg, E. M. & Goodall, H.L. (2003). Organizational Communication: Balancing Creativity and Constraint. USA: Bedford

Books

Miller, K. (2005). Organizational Communication: Approaches and Processes. 4th ed. California: Wadworths

Putnam, L. (2000). The New Handbook of Organizational Communication: Advances in Theory, Research, and

Methods.California: Sage Publication

Shockley-Zalabak, P. (2001). Fundamentals of Organizational Communication: Knowledge, Sensitivity, Skills, and

Values.Colorado Springs: Allyn & Bacon

Mahbob, M. H., & Sulaiman, W. I. W. (2015). Kepentingan Kecerdasan Emosi Dalam Komunikasi Keorganisasian Dan Pengaruhnya

Terhadap Kepuasan Kerja. Malaysian Journal of Communication, 31(2), 533–546.

AH20703 HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT (HRM)

This course will provide students with a basic understanding of human resource management. This course will introduce students

to the importance of labour management elements, including the roles and functions of human resource management and

procedures on recruitment and selection, performance and appraisal, payment systems and working hours, benefits and

rewards, disciplinary systems and termination of service, managing industrial disputes, improving productivity and commitment,

training and development as well as safety and health. In addition, this course will also focus on managerial approaches on labour-

management relations and the practice of domestic inquiry.

Page 32: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

32

References

Aminuddin. (2014). Human Resource Management. Principles and Practices. (3rd ed.). Kuala Lumpur: Oxford

University Press.

Aminuddin. (2018). Human Resource Management. Principles and Practices. (3rd ed.). Kuala Lumpur: Oxford University Press.

Alex K.B Yong. (1996). Malaysian Human Resource Management. Kuala Lumpur: MIM

Bearwell, i. Holden, L. and Claydon, T. (2004). (4th ed.) Human Resource Management: A Contemporary Approach. Leicester:

Prentice Hall.

Dessler, G.( 2002). (8th ed.) Human Resource Management. Prentice Hall.

Malik, A. (2019). Strategic Human Resource Management and Employment Relations: An International Perspective. Springer.

Singapore: Springer Nature Singapore Pte Ltd.

Weisner & Millet (2003). Human resource management. Challenges & future directions. Queensland: Wiley

AH10403 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS IN MALAYSIA

This course is an introductory to the Malaysian Industrial Relations as it will introduce students to the background and the system

of Malaysian industrial relations from the social sciences inter-disciplinary perspective. Generally, the objective of this course is to

provide students with an understanding of the background and perspectives pertaining to the discipline of industrial relations in

the Malaysia context. In addition, this course seeks to provide an explanation of the terms and conce pts that are important and

are often used in discussing the discipline of industrial relations. It also exposes students to the system and the pattern of

industrial relations in a comprehensive manner.

References

Amossé, T., Bryson, A., Forth, J., & Petit, H. (2016). Comparative workplace employment relations: an analysis of practice in

Britain and France. London: Palgrave Macmillan.

Anantaraman, V. (1997). Malaysian Industrial Relations: Law and Practice. Kuala Lumpur: UPM Press Ayadurai, D. (2001).

Industrial Relations in Malaysia. Kuala Lumpur: Malayan Law Journal

Balakrishnan Parasuraman. (2003). Industrial Relations in Malaysia: Approaches and Practices. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan

Bahasa dan Pustaka

Dzurizah Ibrahim et al. (2009). Hubungan Industri dan Sumber Manusia: Isu dan Perpektif. Kota Kinabalu: UMS Maimunah

Aminudin. (2013). Malaysian Industrial Relations and Employment Law. Kuala Lumpur: McGraw-Hill

Sarma, A. M. (2015). Industrial relations : Conceptual and legal framework. Himalaya Publishing House.

AH20603 POLITICAL ECONOMY OF INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

This course explains the role of the political economy in influencing the industrial relations climate in a country. The cour se will

analyze regulations and national policies as well as the impact of the growth of multinational corporations and foreign direct

investment to changes in work organization and industrial relations system of the country.

References

Anita Hammer, Adam Fishwick .(2020). The Political Economy Of Work In Global South. Red Globe Press.

Aykac, A. (2016). The Political Economy of Employment Relations. Alternative theory and Practice. London: Routledge

Haworth, N. & Hughes, S. (2003). International Political Economy and Industrial Relations. British Journal of Industrial

Relations. 41 (4) : 665–682

Hyman, R. (1989). The Political Economy of Industrial Relations. London: Macmillan

Page 33: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

33

Wever, K. S. & Turner, L. (eds.) (1995). The Comparative Political Economy of Industrial Relations. Wisconsin- Madison: IRRA

AH20303 ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR

This course about the study and application of knowledge about how people as individuals and as groups act within organizations.

Its strive to identify ways in which people can act more effectively. Organizational behaviour is a scientific discipline in which a

large number of research studies and conceptual developments are constantly adding to its knowledge base. It is also an applied

science, in that information about effective practices in one organization is being exended to many others.

References

Blyton, P. & Turnbull, B. (2000). The Dynamics of Employee Relations. London: Macmillan

Dzurizah Ibrahim et. al. (2000). Hubungan Industri dan Sumber Manusia: Isu dan Perspektif. Kota Kinabalu: Universiti

Malaysia Sabah

Johns, G. & Saks, A.M. (2004). Organizational Behaviour: Understanding and Managing Life at Work. New Jersey: Prentice

Hall

Newstrom, J.W. & Davis, K. (2002). Organisational Behaviour: Human Behaviour at Work. 11th ed. Boston: McGraw Hill

Rollinson, D. & Broadfield, A. (2002). Organisational Behaviour and Analysis: An Integrated Approach. London: Financial

Times Management

Tejpal Sheth.(2020) Organizational Behaviour. US.Mahajan Publishing House.

Ricky W. Griffin, Jean M. Phillips, Stanley M. Gully (2019). Organization Behaviour (an Asian Perspective). Cengage

Learning Asia Pte.

AH21303 CONTEMPORARY TRADE UNION MOVEMENT

This course offers a better understanding of the trade union movement particularly in the United Kingdom, Europe and some other

parts of the world. The subject addresses the historical development of trade union and the external forces and intern al factors

that influence trade unions movement to progressively respond to the needs of political, economic and social actors. The era of

globalization and the rapid changes of technology are among the factors that shaped the trade unions today.

References

Fairbrother, P (2000) Trade Unions at the Crossroads. London : Bookcraft

Gallin, D (2004) International Labour movement: Contemporary issues in the trade union Movement, Eastbourne: Global Labour

Institute

Gender Equality (2007) Gender Equality: An Action Programme on Achieving gender equality In trade union. ITUC

International Trade Union Confederation

Herman Cohen (2017).Excerpt Fom Trade Union Law and Cases.US:Forgotten Books.

Balasubramaniam A.Tarumarajaak,Fatimah Omar,Fatimah Wati,Sarah (2015) .The Relationship Between Union Organizaion and UnionEffectiveness: The Role of Type Of Union as Moderator. Social and Behavioral Sciences (211),34-41.

AH20203 LABOUR LAW

This course gives a chance to study several important concepts in Malaysian labour law, employment law and industrial relations

law, in general. In order to develop the students’ understanding, they are required to study the strengths and weaknesses of

relevant law, in order to analyze the effectiveness of existing labour law components in protecting employer- employee rights both

Page 34: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

34

in public and private sector. Main focus will be towards the principle labour related acts. Landmark cases will be used to enhance

understanding about the law discussed.

References

Adalberto Perulli and Tiziano Treu.(2019). The Role of the State and Industrial Relations (Studies in Employment and Social Policy

Book 53) Kindle Edition. Kluwer Law International

Anantaraman, V. (1997). Malaysian Industrial Relations: Law and Practice. Kuala Lumpur: Universiti Putra Malaysia Press

D’Cruz. M.N. (1998). A Practical Guide to Malaysian Labour Laws. Kuala Lumpur: Berita Publishing

Goh Chen Chuan. (1997). Guide to The Employment Act and Labour Laws of Malaysia. Kuala Lumpur: Leeds

Siti Zaharah Jamaluddin. (2002). Pengenalan Kepada Akta Kerja 1955. 2nd ed. Kuala Lumpur: Universiti Malaya

Siti Zaharah Jamaludin. (2000). Pengenalan Kepada Undang-Undang Perhubungan Perusahaan di Malaysia. Kuala Lumpur:

Universiti Malaya

Malaysia Labor Law and Regulations handbook (2017)

AH20403 PRODUCTIVITY MANAGEMENT AND INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

This course will introduce student to quality management in public and private sectors, productivity, and the effect of industrial

democracy in any organizations. This course will focus more on industrial relations and human resource management aspect.

Productivity and quality are two major elements in any organization. In the next millennium, the world will focus on quality and

productive human resources. Therefore, this course is designed especially explore various functions of productivity management.

The topic cover in this course: Quality management, quality control circle, total quality management, productivity management,

employee involvement, profit sharing, teamwork, health and safety management and ISO 9000.

References

Armstrong, M. (1996) Personnel Management Practice, 6th Edition, Kogan Page: UK Marchington, M. Op.cit. Ch.5

Collard, R. and Dale, B. (1985) “Quality Circles-Why They Break Down and Why They Hold Up” Personnel Management, February

Bailey, C. (2016). The productivity project: Proven ways to become more awesome. Piatkus.

Besterfield, D.H. et.al. (1995) Total Quality Management; Prentice Hall: New Jersey

Bradley, K. et.al. “Employee Ownership and Company Performance”, Industrial Relations, Vol.29, No.3

Kiran. (2020). Work organization and methods engineering for productivity. BSP Books.

Oakland, J.S (1995) Total Quality Management: The Route to Improving Performance, 2nd Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann: UK

Hradesky. (1995) TQM Handbook, McGraw-Hill: USA.

AH20503 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY AND HEALTH

This course introduces students to the approaches of industrial accidents and safety. The discussion will be focused on labour law

and industrial safety, the role of employers in providing safety measures, involvement of related parties such as Social Security

Organisation (SOCSO), the Ministry of Human Resources and the private sector. Additionally, the students will be exposed to

number of cases on industrial accidents and safety at the international as well as national levels.

References

Alli., B. (2001). Fundamental Principles of Occupational Health and Safety. Geneva: ILO

Page 35: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

35

Goetsch, D.L. (2005). Occupational Safety and Health for Technologist, Engineers, and Managers. New Jersey: Prentice Hall

Ismail Bahri. (2002). Pengaturan Sendiri di dalam Pengurusan Keselamatan dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan. Kuala

Lumpur:McGraw Hill Malaysia

Kamal Halili Hassan. (2001). Undang-undang Keselamatan Industri di Malaysia. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa Pustaka

Nicholas, C. & Wangel, A. (ed). (1991). Safety at Work in Malaysia. Kuala Lumpur: Universiti Malaya

Reese, C. D. (2016). Occupational health and safety management : A practical approach. CRC Press.

Spellman, F. R. (2015). Occupational safety and health simplified for the industrial workplace. Bernan Press.

AH21003 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY IN INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

This course aims to provide the basis for research methods in the field of industrial relations. Students will be exposed to a variety

of research approaches and techniques and this includes the preparation of the research proposal, formulating problem statement

and research questions and the use of quantitative methods, qualitative and a combination of both. This course is designed to

prepare the students to conduct further research for their academic exercise.

References

Babbie, E. (2010). The Practice of Social research (12th Edition). Wadsworth: Cengage Learning. Bryman, A. (2012). Social

Research Methods (4th Edition). New York: Oxford University Press.

Bryman, A., & Bell, E. (2019). Social research methods (5th ed.). Oxford University Press.

Creswell, J.W. (2002). Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative, and Mixed Methods Approaches. London: SAGE

Publications

Creswell, J. W., & Creswell, J. D. (2018). Research design: qualitative, quantitative, and mixed methods approaches (5th ed.). Los

Angeles: SAGE.

Fuad Mohammed BArawi (2017)Metodologi Penyelidikan:panduan menulis tesis. Penerbit UUM. Sintok.

Kaufman, B. (2004). Theoretical Perspectives on Work and The Employment Relationship. New York: Cornell Press

University

Kelly, D. (1991). Researching Industrial Relations: Methods and Methodology. ACIRRT Monograph No. 6. New South Wales:

Federation Press

AH30103 STRATEGY OF BARGAINING AND ARBITRATION

This course provides student with concept, principles, strategy and basic technique of collective bargaining. The course will also

focus on the goals and objectives of the consultation and arbitration strategy. Additionally, this course also discusses the

negotiation techniques practiced in the private and public sectors. Students will also be given latest case studies to enhance their

knowledge in this field.

References

Alexendra, Cooper Brian,Hollan Petter .(2018). How do industrial relations climate and union instrumentality enhance

employee performance? The mediating effects of perceived job security and trust in management. Human Resource

Management Journal. 58(1), 35-44.

Aminuddin. (2017). Human Resource Management: Principles and Practices. Oxford University Press.

Aidt & Tzannatos. (2002). Union and Collective Bargaining: Economic Effects in a Global Environment. World Bank.

Balasubramaniam A.Tarumarajaak,Fatimah Omar,Fatimah Wati,Sarah (2015) .The Relationship Between Union Organizaion and

Jane McAlevey .(2020). A Collective Bargain Union organizing, and the Fight For Democracy

Page 36: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

36

Lewicki. et. al. (2000). Negotiation. 3rd ed. Illinois: McGraw-Hill.

Newman Alexendra, Cooper Brian,Hollan Petter .(2018). How do industrial relations climate and union instrumentality enhance

employee performance? The mediating effects of perceived job security and trust in management. Human Resource

Management Journal. 58(1), 35-44.

Effective from 1st Januari 2003Smith, J. et al. (2004). Collective Bargaining Simulated. 5th ed. New Jersey: Prentice Hall.

Jane McAlevey .(2020). A Collective Bargain Union organizing, and the Fight For Democracy

AH30303 COMPARATIVE INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

This course discusses the theoretical aspects, concepts and approaches employed in the discipline of comparative industrial

relations and industrial relations practices in some selected countries. The objective of this course is to review the development

and practices of industrial relations at the international level, analyze the differences and similarities of practice and practical

industrial relations system and assess how changes in political policy, economic and social influence of universal form of industrial

relations in selected countries.

References

Adams, R.J. (1991). Comparative Industrial Relations. London: Harper Collins

Bamber,G.J. & Lansbury, R.D. (ed). (2000). International and Comparative Industrial Relations. London: Allan & Unwin

Barbash & Barbash. (1989). Theories and Concept in Comparative Industrial Relations. California: University South Carolina Press

Bean, R. (1994). Comparative Industrial Relations. London: Routledge

Sharma. B. (1996). Industrial Relations in Asean: A Comparative Study. Kuala Lumpur: International Law Book Services

AH30503 TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT

This course introduces students to the theory and practice of training in an organization. The needs for employees’ training and

development are in line with the needs of human resource development at the macro level in a country. Among other things, this

course will explain the process of training development, designing, implementation and evaluation processes within the

organization. In addition, the course aims to integrate understanding of the training theories and concepts in designing a

systematic and effective training.

References

Blanchard N.P. (2003). Effective Training: System, Strategies and Practices. New Jersey: Prentice Hall Desimone, R.L. et al.

(2002). Human Resource Development. 3rd ed. Thompson: South Western Kirkpatrick, D. (2000). Evaluating Training

Programmes: The Four Level. Chicago: McGraw-Hill

Noe, R. (2002). Employee Training and Development. Chicago: McGraw-Hill

Fuad Mohammed BArawi (2017)Metodologi Penyelidikan:panduan menulis tesis. Penerbit UUM. Sintok.

AH30903 INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM

This course covers specific area of industrial management information system, which includes application of computers

technologies in contemporary human resource information system field. Future industrial relations practitioners shall be able

to study, analyze and utilize concepts, issues, challenges and techniques of effective organizational administration of such

technologies. Students will also learn, among others, about software selection, system maintenance, evaluation and

Page 37: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

37

execution. Therefore, computer packages, online applications, software or freewares will be utilized in this course.

References

Bondarouk, T. (Ed.). (2009). Handbook of Research on E-Transformation and Human Resources Management Technologies:

Organizational Outcomes and Challenges: Organizational Outcomes and Challenges. IGI Global.

Baker, K.N. & Housden, R.R. (1994). Information Technology Management. 2nd ed. Oxford: Butterworth- Heineman Ltd.

Gueutal, H. & Stone, D.L. (2005). The Brave New World of e-HR: Human Resources in the Digital Age. Wiley: West Sussex.

Laudon, K. and Laudon, J. (2004). Management Information Systems: Managing the Digital Firm. 8th ed. New York: Prentice Hall.

Malaga. (2005). Information Systems Technology. New York: Prentice Hall

Parker, C. & Case, T. (1993). Management Information System. 2nd ed. Singapore: McGraw-Hill

Torres-Coronas, T. (Ed.). (2008). Encyclopedia of Human Resources Information Systems: Challenges in e-HRM: Challenges in e-

HRM. IGI Global.

AH30203 EMPLOYMENT & MANPOWER ISSUES

This course covers the interdisciplinary aspects, which includes assumptions and views from various disciplines: political an d

economic, sociology, management, trade unionist, the State as well as employees. This course will discuss contemporary

employment issues occur around the globe particularly Malaysia. It will also cover on contemporary topics on minimum retirement

age, minimum wages, work-life balance policy in organization as well as other contemporary labour issues. Thus, how far the

development and the changing pattern of employment relations and workforces affect workers and workplaces in Malaysia will

also be discussed accordingly. Topics given are based on the current / contemporary labour/employment issues.

References

Abendroth, A-K. & den Dulk, L. (2011). Support for the work-life balance in Europe: the impact of state, workplace and family

support on work-life balance satisfaction. Work, employment and society. 25(2) 234-256.

Noon, M & Blyton, P. (2007). The realities of work. Experiencing work and employment in contemporary society. (3rd ed.).

Hampshire: Palgrave Macmillan.

Dharam Ghai (2003). Decent Work: Concept and Indicators. International Labour Review. 142 (2). Pp 113-145. Dzurizah Ibrahim

& Jalihah Md. Shah. (2014). Buruh Kanak-kanak di Sabah. Kota Kinabalu: Penerbit UMS

Dzurizah Ibrahim. (2015). ‘An Overview Of Work-Life Management Practices From Malaysian Perspective’. International

Business Management. 9 (4). 514-523.

Dzurizah Ibrahim, Kee. Y. Sabariah & Rose Patsy Tibok. (2016). ‘Between work responsibilities and family obligations: A

study on the management of work-life integration among academics’. International Business Management. 10 (18):

4336-4341.

Dzurizah Ibrahim. 2015. ‘An Overview of the State’s Influences Of Workers’ Work-Life Integration In Malaysia’.

International E-Journal Of Advances In Social Sciences (IJASOS). 1 (2). 163-173.

AH30403 INTERNATIONAL HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

This course is to discuss the International Human Resource Management at the global and International perspectives.

International Human Resource field only get the attention among expert of Human-Resource since decade 1990. This

phenomenon causes by the development and growth of the multinational companies all over the world, including Malaysia.

Therefore, this course would expose by detailed international human resource, human resource approach oriented by

western and east, and multinational company operation mainly in practice human-resources background respectively. In

Page 38: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

38

addition, multinational cross culture also will be suggested and relate with domestic human resource management.

References

Ab. Aziz Yusof. (2000). Pembangunan Expatriat Dalam Konteks Pengurusan Sumber Manusia Antarabangsa. Sintok, Kedah:

Universiti Utara Malaysia

Dennis R.B., Randall, S. & Randall, S. (2004). International Human Resource Management. Routledge

Dowling, P. & Welch, D. (2004). International Human Resource Management: Managing People in a Multinational Context.

Ohio: South Western College Publishing

Tayeb. M. (2005). International Human Resource Management: A Multinational Companies Perspective. USA: Oxford

University Press

Torrington, D. (2001). International Human resource management: Think Globally, Act Locally. New York: Prentice Hall

Anne-Wil Harzing, J. van Ruysseveldt.(2017). International Human Resource Management. A Critical Text. Sage Publications,

Sebastian Reiche, Anne-Wil Harzing and Helene Tenzer (eds.)(2019) International Human Resource Management.,(2019). SAGE

Publications Ltd., London.

AH31203 COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT

Compensation management is a critical activity for an organization. In this era of constant change, the challenge of attracting and

retaining employees and of motivating them to high levels of performance is greater than ever. Organization must compete for a

strong workforce while simultaneously surviving within a range of constraint. Growth in product, along with additional legal

pressure, has organizations today more constrained than ever making compensation decision. The compensation field has been

depicted variously as a group of theories, a set of administrative practices, or a set of techniques. This course will introduce

to student to learn of these conflicting depictions by relating theory to practices and presenting techniques to aid in developing

sound compensation practices.

References

Bhattacharyya D. K. 2015 (2nd Edition). Compensation Management. India. Oxford

Bergmann, T. & Scarpello, V. (2000). Compensation Decision Making. Ohio: South Western College Publication

Byars, L.L. & Leslie W.R. (2000). Human Resource Management. Illinois: Irwin

Henderson, R. (2003). Compensation Management in a Knowledge-Based World. New Jersey: Prentice Hall

Martocchio, J. (2004). Strategic Compensation: A Human Resource (International Edition), 3rd ed. New York: Prentice Hall

Milkovich, G.T. & Newman. (2005). Compensation. Boston: McGraw-Hill

Milkovich G.T. 2014. (11th Edition). Compensation. Singapore. McGraw Hill.

AH30703 WORKING ORGANIZATION TRANSITION

This course provides students with an exposure to the transitional process of conventional industrial relations toward a

contemporary setting, which deeply impacted by globalization. Their impact on the roles and interest of industrial relations actors

is studied. Moreover, the transitional process and issues within the organization, dealt with or by the actors, will be duly analyzed

in the light of globalization forces.

References

Babiak, J. et. al. (2004). Defending the Digital Frontier: Practical Security for Management. 2nd ed. West Sussex: John Wiley

& Sons

Page 39: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

39

Ford, K. & Cutcher-Gershenfeld, J. (2005). Valuable Disconnects In Organizational Learning Systems: Integrating Bold

Visions And Harsh Realities (Industrial and Organizational Psychology). New York: Oxford University Press

Holman, D. et. al. (2004). The Essentials of the New Workplace: A Guide to the Human Impact of Modern Working Practices.

West Sussex: John Wiley & Sons

Jacoby, S.M. (2004). The Embedded Corporation: Corporate Governance and Employment Relations in Japan and the

United States. New Jersey: Princeton University Press

Stein, T.S. (2002). Workforce Transitions from the Profit to the Nonprofit Sector (Nonprofit and Civil Society Studies). New York:

Kluwer Academic Publisher

Sebastian Reiche, Anne-Wil Harzing and Helene Tenzer (eds.)(2019) International Human Resource Management.,(2019). SAGE

Publications Ltd., London.

AH20503 INDUSTRIAL SOCIETY AND EMPLOYMENT RELATIONS

This course offers an analysis towards society and industrialisation process by focusing on theoretical and practical aspect in

society. The process of industrialisation contributes to the existing of new forms of society, with special features such as the

division of labour, changes of production mode and the conflict management. Furthermore, this course also provides knowledge of

the ‘work’ and the ‘employment’ in industrial society. In the beginning, student will be learning about theoretical and approaches to

understand industrial society and the employment relations as well as labour process development.

Rujukan

Abdul Rahman Aziz. 1995. Sosiologi Industri Suatu Pengenalan. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka. Edgell, S. 2012. The

sociology of work. London: Sage.

Grint, K., & Nixon, D. (2015). The sociology of work (4th ed.). Polity Press.

Noon, M & Blyton, P. (2007). The realities of work. Experiencing work and employment in contemporary society. (3rd ed.).

Hampshire:

Palgrave Macmillan.

Watson. T.J. 2003. Sociology Work and Industry. 4th Edition. London Routledge.

Watson, T. (2017). Sociology, work and organisation (7th ed.) Routledge.

AH31503 DEMOCRACY AND EMPLOYEE PARTICIPATION AT WORKPLACE

The aim of this ourse is to introduce the basic concept of industrial democracy and employee participation. Industrial

democracy is not new field of study but it has been gone through an evolution since 17 century. Today, it has been discussed

under many title such employee participation, employee involvement, high work place performance and employee

empowerment. The key issue in this course is to explain the role of industrial democracy and employee participation concepts

in relations to the workplace performance and employee voice in key decisions at the workplace. This course is also

discussing many case studies that practice in the company and workplace.

References

Parasuraman, B. (2014). Employee Participation in Malaysia: Theory and Practice. UMK Press, Unversiti Malaysia

Kelantan.

Parasuraman, B. (2006). Hubungan Industri di Malaysia: Pendekatan dan Amalan. KL:Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Harley, B., Hyman, J., and Thompson, T. (2005). Participation and democracy at work: essay in honour of Harvie Ramsay,

New York: Palgrave Mac Millian

Page 40: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

40

Hyman, J., & R. Mason. (1995) Managing employee involvement and participation. London: Sage Publication.

Gollan, P. and Lewin, D. (2013). Employee representation in non-union firms: An overview. Journal of Industrial Relations.

52 (1).

Markey, R. (2001). Global patterns of participation: model of employee participation in a changing global

environment:diversity and interaction. Aldershot: Ashgate

AH32503 EMPLOYMENT LAW

This course exposes students to the importance of employment law in the context of employment relationship. The

importance of employment law in ensuring a harmonious relationship cannot be separated and is a major factor in ensuring

harmony in the workplace. This exposure will give a new perspective to the students, especially in preparation for the workplace.

Rujukan

Siti Zaharah Jamaluddin. (2000). Pengenalan kepada Undang- Undang Perhubungan Perusahaan di Malaysia. Kuala Lumpur,

Penerbit Universiti Malaya.

Anantaraman V. (1997) Malaysian Industrial Relations. Law & Practice. Serdang: Universiti Putra Malaysia Press.

Anantaraman, V (2007). Union Recognition: A Minefield In Malaysian Industrial Relations”,

(www.vodppl.upm.edu.my/uploads/docs/dce5634_1298967134.pdf)

Kamal Halili Hassan, (2004). Bidang kuasa Mahkamah Perusahaan: satu kritikan , Jurnal Undang-Undang dan Masyarakat, 8

(2004) 19-37

Kamal Halili Hassan dan Rose Effendi Hussein. (2003). Undang-undang Pertikaian Perusahaan dan Mogok di Malaysia.

Bangi: Penerbit UKM

Anantaraman, V , (2002 ), The Industrial Relations Act 1967: A Review From The Workers' Perspective, Malayan Law Journal

Articles , https://www.scribd.com/doc/101344357/The-Industrial-Relations-Act-1967-a-Review

Herman Cohen (2017).Excerpt Fom Trade Union Law and Cases.US:Forgotten Books.

Kamaruddin Said, (1992), Perhubungan Perusahaan di Malaysia, Bangi: Penerbit UKM

Parul Gupta (2019).Industrial Relation an labour law For Manager. SAGE Publications Pvt. Ltd;

AH31203 MIGRASI DAN MOBILITI BURUH

The issue of migration and the labour movement is not a new phenomenon. This course will explain the push and pull factors

which drive the process of migration to the outside of the domestic economy and the political structure of the region. This course

will also provide a thorough understanding of the process of labour mobility. In addition, the effects of migration and labour

mobility on the changes of employment structure in urban and rural areas, labour market competencies, work style and the

structure of employment will also be highlighted.

Rujukan

Appelbaum, Richard P. & William I. Robinson (eds.). 2005. Critical Globalization Studies. New York: Routledge. De

Haan, A. & Rogaly, B. 2002. Labour Mobility and Rural Society. Routledge: New York.

Fornahl,D., Zellner,C. & Audretsch, D.B. 2005. The Role of Labour Mobility and Informal Networks for Knowledge Transfer.

Springer: New York.

Peter Stalker, Workers without Frontiers (Boulder, Col.: Lynne Rienner, 2000), pp. 131-137.

Robinson, William I. 2004. A Theory of Global Capitalism: Production, Class, and State in a Transnational World. Baltimore: Johns

Hopkins University Press.

Page 41: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

41

Wilson, William Julius. 1996. When Work Disappears: The World of the New Urban Poor. NY: Vintage Books.

AH32003 INNOVATION AT THE WORKPLACE

This course focuses on the integration among creativity, innovation and organizational change. Nowadays relevant issues related

to workers and innovation development is vital. The organizational implications of these developments affects working

environment and workers affairs alike. This course also covers innovative application in various domains, with respect to industrial

relations.

References

Collins Fagerberg, J., Mowery, D. and Nelson, R. (Eds).2005. The Oxford Handbook of Innovation. 2005, Oxford: Oxford University

Press.

Rogers, E.M. 2003. Diffusion of Innovations. (4th ed.). New York: Free Press

Rifkin, J. 1995. The End of Work: The Decline of the Global Labor Force and the Dawn of the Post-Market Era. New York: Putnam.

Stoneman, P. The Economics of Technological Diffusion. 2002, Oxford : Blackwell Publishers.

Alec Ross..2016. The Industries of the Future. UK. Simon & Schuste.

W. Warner Burke.2017. Organization Change (PDF) Theory and Practice .US. Sage Publication.

AH32203 EMPLOYMENT, LABOUR AND CAPITAL

The world of work and employment relationship is experiencing a transformation and is always full of new challenges. The

emergence of a new management strategy, human capital and innovative policies and practices and the latest organizational form

is part of the challenge. This course focuses on labour economics and the natural dynamics and the employment relationship at all

levels of organization. In addition, the significance of organizational context, social, political, and economic history will also be

discussed. Topics include the role of labour supply, human capital investment, labour demand, labour mobility, wage and

productivity, employment relationships, trade unions and gender in the context of the labour market.

References

A.L. Booth. (1995), The Economics of the Trade Union ( Cambridge ). Chapter 4,5. Cahuc, P. and A. Zylberberg (2004), Labour

Economics, Cambridge: The MIT Press.

Davis, S. and Haltiwanger, J. (1999), “Gross Job Flows”, in O. Ashenfelter and D. Card (eds.), Handbook of Labor Economics,

North Holland, vol 3B.

Davis , S., Haltiwanger, J. and Schuh, S. (1996), Job Creation and Destruction, Cambridge, M.A: MIT Press.

Mortensen, D. and Pissarides, C. (1999), “Job Reallocation, Employment Fluctuations and Unemployment”, in Woodford, M. and

Taylor, J. (eds), Handbook of Macroeconomics, Elsevier Science Publisher, vol 1B,

Naylor, R.A. (2003), “Economic models of union behaviour”, chapter 2 in Addison, J. and

Schnabel, C. (eds.), International Handbook of Trade Unions, Edward Elgar.

AH33503 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS IN INFORMAL SECTOR

Changes in the labour market have impacted primarily on the employment relationship due to the occurrence of a change in the

shape and pattern of the new structure of employment. These new structure of employment contributed to job instability,

particularly among low income-skilled workers. This includes those in the informal sector. Thus, this course focuses on how the

Page 42: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

42

scenario changes in the labour market in the informal sector has led to the complex employment rel ationship due to the existence

of non-standard employment. This course is also designed to expose the students to the essential elements of the changing

character of industrial relations worldwide as well as to develop knowledge and understanding of the co ncept of industrial

relations in informal sector.

References

Bangasser, P. E. (2000). The ILO and the informal sector: An institutional history. Employment Paper 2000/9. Geneva: ILO.

Choonara, J. (2019). Insecurity, Precarious Work and Labour Markets: Challenging the Orthodoxy. Switzerland: Palgrave

Macmillan.

Gerrard, J. (2019). Precarious Enterprise on the Margins: Work, Poverty, and Homelessness in the City (Vol. 53). Australia:

Palgrave Macmillan.

Huitfeld, H. et al. (2009). Informality and Informal employment. Promoting pro-poor growth employment. OECD.

(1999). Trade union in the informal sectors. Findings their bearings. Nine country papers. Labour Education

1999/3. No. 119. Geneva: ILO.

Ram, M., Edwards, P. & Jones, T. (2007). Staying underground: Informal work, small firms and employment regulations in the UK.

Work and Occupations. 34:3, pp. 318-344.

Ram, M., Edwards, P. & Gilman, M. (2001). The Dynamics of informality: Employment relations in the small firms and the effects

of regulatory change. Work, Employment and Society. 15:4. Pp. 845-861.

Williams, C.C & Nadin, S. (2012). Work beyond employment: Representations of informal economic activities. Work,

Employment and Society. 26. Pp. 1-10.

William, C.C & Windebank, J. (1998), Informal Employment in the Advanced Economics, implications for work and welfare.

Psychology Press

AH32103 ETHICS IN THE WORKPLACE

This course will explore issues of ethics in our everyday life, especially the challenges we encounter in the workplace. Topi cs

covered will include major issues that arise in business and corporate life, such as profitability and responsibility to

shareholders, corporate responsibility for the environment, employee rights and responsibilities, truthfulness and fraud business

deals. However, this course will also seriously examine the matters of personal integrity and character and their relationship to

business and professional ethics; the practical implications of ethical decisions; and conflicts that arise between personal interest

and moral, legal or spiritual imperatives. These issues will be tied to self-exploration and an effort to define our own moral stance.

References

Aldulaimi, S.H. (2016), Fundamental Islamic perspective of work ethics. Journal of Islamic Accounting and

Business Research, 7(1), 59-76

Deckop, J.R. 2006. Human Resource Management Ethics: Information Age Publishing.

Edwards. R. A. 2003. Working Ethic: Enterprise and Flexibility in the Contemporary Workplace: University of Technology, Sydney -

Australian Centre for Organizational, Vocational & Adult Learning Research.

Hansson, S.O. 2005. The Ethics of Workplace Privacy. Elin Palm, SALTSA:Peter Lang Pub Inc.

Johnson, C.E. 2006. Ethics in the Workplace: Tools and Tactics for Organizational Transformation SAGE Publications.

Mahan, B.J. 2002. Forgetting Ourselves on Purpose: Vocation and the Ethics of Ambition, San Francisco, CA:Jossey-

Bass.15.

Ayop, Megat, Arifin, M., & Ahmad, A. H. 2016. Konsep Integriti dalam Organisasi Polis Diraja Malaysia (PDRM): Satu tinjauan awal, (8), 135–147. Shamsudin, Abdul Rahman dan Romle .2015. The Moderating of Islamic Work Ethic on Relationship of Emotional Intelligence and

Page 43: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

43

Leadership Practice: A Proposed Framework.International Journal of Innovation 6(2).140-143.

AH32603 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS IN EUROPE

This course offers a broad and comprehensive examination of the interaction between capital and labour across European

countries. Institutionalist and actor-oriented theories serve as the framework for an empirically grounded comparative and

historical analysis of developments in organized labour and capital actors’ strategies, the emergence of institutions governi ng the

employment relationship, and social policy. Therefore, this course is designed to expose students about industrial relations system

in Europe as it serves a sound comparative foundation.

References

Bamber, G., Lansbury, R. and Wailes, N. 2004. “Globalisation and changing patterns of employment relations: International and

comparative frameworks’, Quarterly Journal of Labor Policy, vol.4:2, pp. 45-68.

Ferner, A. and Hyman, R. 2009 (eds). Changing Industrial Relations in Europe, Black well, UK, 2nd edition. Ferner, A and Hyman,

R. (eds.). (1994). New Frontiers in European Industrial Relations, Wiley, UK.

Lansbury, R.D., Wailes, N. and Bamber, G. 2004 International and Comparative Employment Relations: Globalisation and the

Development Market Economies, Allen and Unwin Sydney.

AH31106 ACADEMIC EXERCISE / PRACTICUM TRAINING

This course is a prerequisite for graduation conferment. It aims to educate students about the practical aspects of the relationship

of employer and employee. A final individual academic exercise or practicum project intended to integrate material already

covered in previous courses, as well as to provide an in-depth exploration of a topic of special interest or career relevance to the

students. Students work closely with an academic advisor and are required to submit a comprehensive written report.

Students will select either to complete academic exercise OR practicum exercise.

AH30803 WAGE AND COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT

Compensation management is a critical activity for an organization. In this era of constant change, the challenge of

attracting and retaining employees and of motivating them to high levels of performance is greater than ever. Organization must

compete for a strong workforce while simultaneously surviving within a range of constraint. Growth in product, along with

additional legal pressure, has organizations today more constrained than ever making compensation decision. The compensation

field has been depicted variously as a group of theories, a set of administrative practices, or a set of techniques. This course will

introduce the student to learn of these conflicting depictions by relating theory to practices and presenting techniques to aid in

developing sound compensation practices.

References

Bhattacharyya D. K. 2015 (2nd Edition). Compensation Management. India. Oxford

Bergmann, T. & Scarpello, V. (2000). Compensation Decision Making. Ohio: South Western College Publication

Byars, L.L. & Leslie W.R. (2000). Human Resource Management. Illinois: Irwin

Henderson, R. (2003). Compensation Management in a Knowledge-Based World. New Jersey: Prentice Hall

Martocchio, J. (2004). Strategic Compensation: A Human Resource (International Edition), 3rd ed. New York: Prentice Hall

Milkovich, G.T. & Newman. (2005). Compensation. Boston: McGraw-Hill

Milkovich G.T. 2014. (11th Edition). Compensation. Singapore. McGraw Hill.

Page 44: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

44

SOCIOLOGY AND SOCIAL ANTHROPOLOGY PROGRAMME (HA14)

AA10103 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY I ELECTIVE CODE: AZ10703

This course introduces the main concepts in the discipline of Sociology. It also discusses social issues that occur in the life of

contemporary societies. The American Sociology Association defines Sociology as the study of society, social reason and the

implications of human actions. Therefore, issues of social phenomena are defined and explained using sociological theories

and perspectives.

References

Cargan, L. & Ballantine, J. (2003). Sociological Footprints: Introductory Readings in Sociology. 9th ed. Belmont, California:

Wadsworth/Thomson Learning.

Curry, T., Jiobu, R. & Schwirian, K. (1997). Sociology for the 21st Century. New Jersey: Prentice Hall. Gelles, R.J. & Levine, A.

(1999). Sociology, An Introduction. Boston: McGraw Hill

Haviland, W.A. (1997). Anthropology. 8th ed. London: Harcourt Brace College Publishers. Kornblum, W. (2003). Sociology in a

Changing World. Belmont: Thomson Wadsworth

AA10203 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY II ELECTIVE CODE: AZ10403

This course is a continuation from AA10103 Introduction to Sociology and Anthropology I. In this course, however, more

emphasis is placed on the discipline of Anthropology. The main focus concerns Culture and Change. At the end of this

course, students are expected to be able to apply this focus to understand anthropological issues in today’s societies.

References

Feraro, G. (2004). Cultural Anthropology: An Applied Perspective. Belmont, California: Wadsworth Publisher. Giddens, A.

(1993). Sociology. 2nd ed. Cambridge: Polity Press.

Kottak, C. P. (2000). Anthropology: The Exploration Of Human Diversity. 8th ed McGraw Hill. Mair, L. (1992). An Introduction to

Social Anthropology. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Nanda, S. & Jay, N. (2004) Cultural Anthropology. Southwest State University, Texas: Wadsworth Publisher.

AA20103 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND DATA ANALYSIS

This course discusses Anthropological and Sociological research techniques used in collecting and analyzing social and

cultural data. Students are also taught the methods of writing research proposals and compiling research findings. To put

their knowledge into practice, students will conduct fieldwork.

References

Baker, T.L. (1994). Doing Social Research. New York: McGraw Hill.

Bechhofer, F. & Paterson, L. (2002). Principles of Research Design in the Social Sciences. New York: Routledge. David, De

Vaus. (2001). Surveys in Social Research. New York: Routledge.

Ezzy, D. (2002). Qualitative Analysis. New York: Routledge.

Page 45: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

45

Neuman, N.L. (2000). Social Research Methods. 4th ed. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.

AA20203 SOCIOLOGY OF TOURISM

Tourism as an industry is often used by Developing Countries as a means of acquiring foreign money and increasing job

opportunities for local people. Many problems, however, arise during the implementation phase of tourism development. This

course, therefore, will consider major issues related to tourism development, for instance, tourism as a vehicle for rural

community development, ecotourism, and the impact of tourism development on the social life, culture and natural

environment of local communities.

References

Butler, R. (ed.) (2004). Tourism Development: Issues for a Vulnerable Industry. Toronto: University of Toronto Press. Butler, R. &

Pearce, D.G. (eds.) (1995). Change in Tourism: People, Places, Process. London: Routledge. Coccossis, H. & Nijkamp, P. (1995).

Sustainable Tourism Development. Aldershot: Avebury.

Hall, C.M. (1994). Tourism and Politics: Policy, Power and Place. Chichester: John Wiley. Pearce, D.G. (ed.). (2001).

Contemporary Issues in Tourism Development. London: Routledge.

AA20303 FAMILY SYSTEMS

This course examines family structures, organization, family relationships and their function in family systems. It provides an

overview of family change, the cause of change and its impact on the family system. It covers intervention strategies, and

examines the dynamics of family interaction and its challenges from a crisis perspective. Strategies and techniques

appropriate for dealing with victims, protection, nurturance, and empowerment are considered.

References

Booth, T. & Booth, W. (1994). Parenting Under Pressure. Philadelphia: Open University Press.

Cai Hua. (2001). Society Without Father or Husbands: The Na of China. Terjemahan Asti Hustvedt. (paperback)

O’Conne, I.H. (1994). Women and the Family. New Jersey: Zed Books Ltd.

Strong, B. (2001). The Marriage and Family Experience. Belmont, California: Wadsworth/Thomson.

Strong, B.D., Sayad, C. & Cohen, T.F. (2001). The Marriage and Family Experience: Intimate Relationships in a Changing

Society. Singapore: Wadsworth Thompson Learning.

AA20403 ETHNIC RELATIONS

This course aims to discuss ethnicity as a social force and as a social phenomenon that exerts a strong influence in the life of

mankind and society, especially in modern society where populations consist of varied ethnic and racial groups. Thus, early

ideas about the creation of racial differences and the construction of racist ideology, problems of ethnic relations, and the

emergence of ethnicity in the modern world are discussed. This course also examines the approaches and political

strategies used in many modern states, especially Malaysia, for managing ethnic diversity, divisions and animosity.

References

Banton, M. (1998). Racial Theories. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Eriksen, T.H. (1993). Ethnicity and Nationalism, Anthropological Perspectives. London: Pluto Press.

Fenton, S. (1999). Ethnicity: Racism, Class and Culture. London: MacMillan Press.

Page 46: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

46

Hutchinson, J. & Smith, A.D. (1996). Ethnicity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Zawawi Ibrahim. (1998). Cultural Contestations: Mediating Identities in a Changing Malaysian Society. Kuala Lumpur: ASEAN

Academic Press.

AA20503 INDUSTRIAL SOCIOLOGY

This course introduces students to the social aspects of industrial processes and activities. Among the issues that will be

discussed are the implications of the Industrial Revolution for current industrial systems and structures. Apart from that,

students will be taught about aspects of work and employer-employee relationships in the context of industrial relations.

Major issues such as workers unions, industrial conflicts, work experience, motivation and job satisfaction, technology

together with work orientation, will be touched up on.

References

Abibullah Hj. Samsudin & Morshidi Sirat. (1999). Kegiatan Perindustrian di Negara Dunia Ketiga Perubahan & Cabaran.

Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Anuwar Ali & Rajah Rasiah. (2000). Perindustrian dan Pembangunan Ekonomi di Malaysia. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan

Pustaka.

Mohd Asri Hj. Abdullah. (1999). Industri Kecil di Malaysia. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Qasim Ahmad. (1999). Revolusi Industri Pertama Sejarah Permasalahan Sosioekonomi dan Politik. Kota Kinabalu: Universiti

Malaysia Sabah.

AA20603 SOCIETY AND RELIGION

This course introduces students to the role of religion in society. Theories on the origin of religion by Tylor, Durkheim

and Malinowski, and theories on the function of religion by Radcliffe-Brown, Kluckhorn and Geertz are discussed. In order to

also understand the role of religion in society, aspects of religion as a group phenomenon, its relation to conflict

and social organization, political life, economics, class systems, and also to the position and status of women, as well as

change are discussed. In the context of culture, religion as systems of meanings, rituals, myths, shamanism and worship are

debated.

References

Beckford, J. A. & Richardon, J. T. (eds.). (2003). Challenging Religion. New York: Routledge.

Child, A. B. & Child, I. L. (1993). Religion and Magic in the Life of Traditional Peoples. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall. Hamilton, M.

(2001). The Sociology of Religion. 2nd ed. New York: Routledge.

Johnstone, R. L. (1997). Religion in Society: A Sociology of Religion. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall. Zuckerman, P. (2003). An

Introduction to the Sociology of Religion. New York: Routledge.

AA20703 SOCIAL INEQUALITY

This course studies the origin of social inequality and its consequences. It focuses mainly on the inequality that is present in the

economic structure of society in the form of social class, and its relationship with other forms of social inequalities based on

ethnicity, gender, generation and age differences. The course also discusses social inequality between countries.

References

Anderson, M. & Collins, P.H. (1992). Race, Class and Gender. Belmont, California: Wadsworth. Blumberg, R.L. (1978).

Page 47: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

47

Stratification: Socio-Economic and Sexual Inequality. Dubuque, Iowa: William C. Brown. Marger, M. (2002). Social Inequality:

Patterns and Processes. 2nd ed. Mayfield Publishing

OiBrien, J. & Howard, J.A. (1998). Everyday Inequalities: Critical Inquiries. Malden, Massachusetts: Blackwell Publishers.

Shapiro, T. (2001). Great Divides: Readings in Social Inequality in the United States. Mayfield Publishing.

AA20803 ENVIRONMENT AND DEVELOPMENT

Development and transition occupy a central focus of this course. The course is concerned with uneven development, its effects

on the access to natural resources such as forests, and issues of redistribution. It is also concerned with exploring the roles of

the state, markets and communities in achieving developmental and environmental outcomes. Using case studies from

Malaysia, other parts of Southeast Asia and else where, students will acquire the skills required to assess the potential

and problems associated with development approaches that rely on natural resource exploitation. Alternative development

approaches and practices being attempted in Southeast Asia and else where will also be discussed.

References

Abdul Rahman Embong. (ed.). (2000). Negara Pasaran dan Pemodenan Malaysia. Bangi: Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia.

Groves, L. & Hinton, R. (eds.). (2004). Inclusive Aid: Changing Power and Relationships in International Development. London:

Earthscan.

Jomo, K.S. et al. (2004). Deforesting Malaysia, The Political Economy and Social Ecology of Agricultural

Expansion and Commercial Logging. London: Zed Books.

Lye Tuck-Po et al. (eds.) (2003). The Political Ecology of Tropical Forests in Southeast Asia. Kyoto: Kyoto University

Press. Roberts, T. & Hite, A. (ed.). (2000). From Modernisation to Globalization. Oxford: Blackwell Publishers.

AA20903 URBAN ANTHROPOLOGY

This course discusses methodological and theoritical problems in the application of anthropological techniques in urban

contexts. The main topics to be discussed include the role of city culture and forms of urban settlement, the anthtropology of

complex societies, social networks and urban relations, work patterns and urban housing, urban ethnicity, problems of

migration, poverty, the informal sector and the analysis of social roles and city economies in developing societies.

References

Gmelech, G. & Zenner, W.P. (1996). Urban Life: Readings in Urban Anthropology. Paperback. Lagates, R.T. & Stout, F. (eds)

(1999). The City Reader. Paperback

Low, S.M. (ed) (1999). Theorizing the City: The New Urban Anthropology Reader. London: Rutgers University Press Robinson,

R. & Goodman, D.S.G. (eds) (1996). The New Rich in Asia: Mobile Phones, McDonalds and Middle Class

Revolution. London: Routledge.

Schnell, I. & Ostendorf, W. (eds) (2002). Studies in Segregation and Desegregation. London: Ashgate.

AA21003 STRUCTURE AND ORGANIZATION OF POWER

This course explains the organizational structure and dynamics of power in pre-industrial and industrial societies, with

empha-sis on those of the Third World. Students will be introduced to the basic concepts and theories of power and

leadership. Topics that will be discussed include the relations between power and leadership in the economic systems,

family and belief systems of traditional societies such as hunters and gatherers, herdsmen, and agricultural societies.

Students will also be taught of the processes of change that affect the social structures and organisation of these societies

when they develop into nation states. Finally, the course will explain systems of power and leadership from the sociocultural

Page 48: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

48

dimension of comtemporary societies.

References

Eisenstadt, S.N. (1999). Patrons, Clients and Friends: Interpersonal Relations and the Structure of Trust in Society.

Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Gellner, E. (1996). Anthropology and Politics: Revolution in the Sacred Grove. Blackwell Publishers.

Gregory, C. (1997). Savage Money, The Anthropology and Politics of Commodity Exchange. Gordon & Breach Publishing

Group.

Kochanck, S.L. (1993). Patron-Client Politics and Business in Bangladesh. SAGE Publications.

Vincent, J. (1995). Anthropology and Politics: Visions, Traditions, and Trends. Arizona: University of Arizona Press.-Hall.

AA21203 CULTURE AND SOCIETY

This course discusses human similarities and diversity from the anthropological perspective. Culture is defined as the way of life

that is shared by members of a community. This course discusses the following, to look at the various cultural characteris-

tics of communities and to understand this from anthropological perspectives.

References

Havilland, William A. (2007). Cultural Anthropology: the human challenge. USA: Wadsworth Publishing. Kottak, Conrad P. (2005).

Mirror of Humanity: a concise introduction to cultural anthropology. New York: McGraw-Hill. Oswell, David. (2006). Culture

and Society: an introduction to cultural studies. UK: Sage Publication.

Peoples, James. (2003). Humanity: an introduction to Cultural Anthropology. Belmont, California: Wadsworth Publishing Co.

Womack, Mari. (2001). Being Human: an introduction to Cultural Anthropology. New York: Prentice Hall.

AA30103 SOCIAL THOUGHT AND THEORY

This course provides a critque of the main issues in classical social theories with emphasis on the analysis of the social

processes in contructing modern society. Students will study in depth the contributions of theorists such as Marx, Weber

and Durkheim, and examine how the ideas of these theorists continue to influence contemporary Sociology.

References

Calhoun, Craig. et.al. (2003). Contemporary Sociological Theory. 2nd ed. Massachussets: Blackwell. Calhoun, Craig. et.al.

(2004). Classical Sociological Theory. 3rd. ed. Massachussets: Blackwell. Durkheim, E. (1982). The Rules of Sociological Method.

London: Macmillan.

Ritzer, G. & Goodman, D.J. (2003). Modern Sociological Theory. 6th ed. Boston: Mc-Graw Hill. Weber, M. (1976). The Protestant

Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism. London: Allen & Unwin.

AA30203 SOCIOLOGY OF MIGRATION

The aim of this course is to provide students with a theoretical knowledge of migration in global and national dimensions and to

enable students to study contemporary migration movements within the framework of theories. It enables students to

obtain knowledge about main migration theories, to understand and analyze migration processes from the sociological

perspective. This course offers a comprehensive overview of the key current theoretical debates in the study of international

migration. It emphasizes exploring both the theoretical debates of the field and the empirical data and case studies on which these

Page 49: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

49

debates hinge. The perspective of this course is primarily sociological, but it also leans heavily on notions from other

disciplines (such as Economics, Law, Political Science, Geography, and Anthropology). The course not only deals with

migration and its causes as such, but also with processes and phenomena that develop in the aftermath of migration, such as

integration,assimilation, and transnationalism.

References

Brettel, C. & Hollingfield. (eds.). 2000. Migration Theory: Talking Across Disciplines. London: Routledge.

Djajic, Slobodan. (ed). 2001. International Migration: Trends, Policies and Economic Impact. London: Routledge. Massey, D. S.,

Arango, J., Hugo, G., Kouaouci, A., Pelegrino, A. & Taylor, J. E. 2005. Worlds In Motion:

Understanding International Migration at the End of the Millenium. New York: Oxford University Press.

Stalker, Peter. 2000. Workers without Frontiers: The Impact of Globalization on International Migration.

Boulder: Lynne Rienner.

Willis, Katie and Brenda Yeoh. (eds). 2000. Gender and Migration. Cheltenham, UK: Edward Elgar.

Council Monograph No. 2, Shanghai, VA: Ashley Printing Services.

AA30303 ENVIRONMENTAL SOCIOLOGY

This course examines environmental problems in Malaysia and in other Southeast Asian countries. Discussions about how these

environmental problems contribute to deforestation, biodiversity loss, soil degradation and land slips, as well as river pollution will

be presented in a way that appears to be based on scientific evidence. Yet, on closer examination such evidence may

have an deological component. Using sociological tools of analysis, this course provides a contextual understanding

of environmental change and how such change is understood at local and international levels. It further examines the role of

science especially the way in which science is used by different interests in defining environmental problems. Also

evaluated is the way in which differences in political and economic power influence the range of responses to social issues

associated with environmental problems, and the way decisions are made about their solution and implementation.

References

Ellen, R., Parkes, P. & Bicker, A. (eds.). (2000). Indigenous Environmental Knowledge and its Transformations.

Amsterdam: Harwood Academic Press Publishers.

Greenough, P. & Tsing, A.L. (eds.). (2003). Nature in the Global South. London: Duke University

Press. Pepper, D. et. al. (2003). Environmentalism. Critical Concepts. London: Routledge, Vol. 1 to 5.

Weiss, M. & Saliha Hassan. (2003). Social Movements in Malaysia: From Moral Communities to NGOs.

London: Routledge/Curzon.

Zerner, C. (ed.). (2000). People, Plants and Justice. New York: Columbia University Press.

AA30403 SOCIAL CHANGE AND DEVELOPMENT

In this course, development is discussed as an historical process which is linked to the increasing influence of western culture and

modernization as global phenomena. The macro-sociological approach will be used to discuss the main issues of development,

including the relationship between culture and development, developed nations and related development issues such as

poverty and starvation, gender and ecology. It also examines the question of whether the legal process can initiate and

sustain social change.

References

Abdul Rahman Embong. (ed.). (2001). Southeast Asian middle Classes Prospects for Social Change and

Democratisation.

Page 50: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

50

Bangi: Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia.

Barnett, T. (1988). Sociology and Development. London: Hutchinson.

Rahimah Abdul Aziz & Mohamed Yusoff Ismail. (eds.). (2000). Masyarakat, Budaya dan Perubahan. Bangi: Universiti

Kebangsaan Malaysia.

Stark, R. (2004). Sociology. California: Wadsworth/Thompson Learning. Vago, S. (1999). Social Change. New

Jersey: Prentice-Hall

AA30503 BORNEO ETHNOGRAPHY

This course introduces students to the socio-cultural diversity of Borneo through the study of specific indigenous communities.

Five main groups will be studied representing examples of marine, riverine or interior populations engaged in a variety of

traditional socio- economic activities, from nomads to shifting cultivators to more sedentary communities.

References

Appell, G.N. (ed) (1976). The Societies of Borneo: Explorations in the Theory of Cognatic Social Structure.

Special Publication of the American Anthropologist Association. Washington D.C: American Anthropologist

Association.

Greeman, J.D. (1970). Report on the Iban. LSE Monographs on Social Anthropology No.41. London: Athlone. Sather, C. (1997).

The Bajau Laut: Adaptation, History and Fate in a Maritime Fishing Society in South- Eastern

Sabah. New York/Kuala Lumpur: Oxford University Pres.

Sutlive, V.H. (ed.). (1991). Female and Male in Borneo. Contributions and Challenges to Gender Studies. Borneo

Research Council Monograph, No. 1. Shanghai, VA: Ashley Printing Services.

Winzeler, R.L. (ed.). (1993). The Seen and the Unseen. Shamanism, Mediumship and Possession in Borneo.

Borneo Research Council Monograph No. 2, Shanghai, VA: Ashley Printing Services.

AA30603 SOCIOLOGY OF COMPLEX ORGANIZATIONS

This course will introduce students to concepts of organizations, together with approaches in the field of Sociology of

Organizations. Among others, the Bureaucracy Theory of Max Weber will be discussed. Understanding organizations in

the modern world, together with issues of class and gender in the context of organizations will also be highlighted in this

course. The management of organizations will be linked to corporate culture. The relationship between long term

economic achievements and corporate culture will also be discussed. Attention will also be given to current issues of corporate

culture circulating in Malaysia.

References

Abd Rahim Abd. Rashid. (2003). Gangguan Seksual Pengurusan Tingkah Laku dan Perkembangan Gender dalam

Organisasi. Kuala Lumpur: Utusan Publications.

Hatch, M.J. (1997). Organization Theory. Modern Symbolic and Postmodern Perspectives. USA: Oxford University Press.

McShane, S.L., Glinow, V. & Mary Ann. (2003). Organizational Behavior. Boston: McGraw-Hill Irwin. Rosazman Hussin & Dayang

Suria Hj. Mulia. (2002). Sosiologi Organisasi Kompleks: Teori & Perspektif. Kota

Kinabalu: Universiti Malaysia Sabah.

AA30903 GENDER ISSUES

The aim of this course is to introduce students to diverse theories that explain gender issues, specifically gender inequality and

gender relations in contemporary society. This course is intended to provide a critical perspective of how different

Page 51: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

51

socie-ties construct gender identity, and gender roles, and how the consequences of such constructions affect institutions, culture

and society. The discussion in this course is divided into four main sections. The first deals with the ideas, concepts and meth-ods

of studying gender and gender inequality in a society. The second section focuses on the major theories of gender analy-sis,

and the comparison of those perspectives. The third section further discusses the theories related to gender issues by

applying the relevant theory to groups that had been marginalized in the previous theoretical discussions. Finally, in the fourth

section, the course addresses the issues that were raised by feminists in their research related to gender. Much of this section will

be spent discussing empirical research in relation to the theories that were discussed in the previous sections.

References

Andersen, Margaret L. 2000. Thinking About Women: Sociological Perspectives on Sex and Gender. 5th ed.

Needham Heights, MA: Allyn Bacon

Acker, Joan. 1990. “Hierarchies, Jobs, Bodies: A Theory of Gendered Organizations.” Gender and Society 4(2): 139-58

Connell, R.W. 2002. Gender: A Short Introduction. Malden, MA: Blackwell RW Connell

Harrison, Wendy Cealey and John Hood-Williams. 2002. Beyond Sex and Gender. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage

Publications Willis, Katie and Brenda Yeoh. (eds). 2000. Gender and Migration. Cheltenham, UK: Edward Elgar.

AA30703 RURAL SOCIOLOGY ELECTIVE CODE: AZ30703

This course focusses on studies of peasant communities, particularly in Southeast Asia. The social structures and ideologies,

economics and political dynamics of these societies will be discussed in detail and linked to issues of rural development,

specifically persistence and change in various agricultural communities.\

References

Rodolphe, de Koninck. (1992). Malay Peasants Coping with the World. Breaking the Community Circle. Singapore: Institute of

Southeast Asian Studies.

Shamsul, A.B. (1986). From British to Bumiputra Rule: Local Politics and Rural Development in Peninsular

Malaysia.

Singapore: Institute of Southeast Asian Studies.

Schulze, H. & Suriani Suratman. (1999). Villagers in Transition. Kota Kinabalu: Universiti Malaysia Sabah.

King, V. & Nazaruddin Jali. (1992). Issues in Rural Development in Malaysia. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan

Pustaka.

AA30803 HUMAN ECOLOGY

This course introduces students to another major sub-discipline of Anthropology which specifically focuses on the interaction

between humans and their environment. There are two main areas of study in Human Ecology: Human Biological Ecology which

focuses on human biological adaptations to the environment, and Cultural Ecology where cultural adaptations are the main

discussion. This course will emphasize Cultural Ecology.

References

Bruhn, John G. (1972). Human Ecology: A Unifying Science? Human Ecology, 2(2):105- 125. Vayda, A.P. & Walters, B.B.

(1999). Against Political Ecology. Human Ecology, 27(1):167-179.

Wilk, Richard. and Stone, Priscilla. (1998). Introduction to A Very Human Ecology: Celebrating the Work of Robert McC.

Netting. Human Ecology‚ 26(2):175-188.

Corning, Peter A. (2000). Biological Adaptation in Human Societies: a `Basic Needs’ Approach. Journal of

Page 52: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

52

Bioeconomics 2:41-86.

Mithen, Steven J. (1989). Modeling Hunter-Gatherer Decision Making: Complementing Optimal Foraging Theory.Human

Ecology, 17(1):59-83.

Brosius, Peter J. (1997). Endangered Forest, Endangered People: Environmentalist Representations of Indigenous

Knowledge. Human Ecology, 25(1):47-69.

AA31003 ETHNOMUSICOLOGY

This course introduces students to the history, concepts, models and methodology in the the discipline of Ethnomusicology.

Lectures will concentrate mainly on the theoretical perspectives of various ethnomusicologists with reference to specific area

studies, while tutorials will focus on field methodology, approaches to transcription and data analysis.

References

Barz, Gregory F. & Cooley, Timothy J. (eds.) (1997). Shadows in the Field. New Perspectives for

Fieldwork in Ethnomusicology. New York, Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Blacking, John. (1995). Music, Culture and Experience: Selected Papers of John Blacking. Edited by Reginald

Byron with a Foreword by Bruno Nettl. Chicago & London: The University of Chicago Press.

Matusky, Patricia & Tan Sooi Beng. (2004). The Music of Malaysia: The Classical, Folk and Syncretic Traditions. SOAS

Musicology Series. Hampshire, England: Ashgate.

Merriam, Alan P. (1964). The Anthropology of Music. Evanston Illinois: Northwestern University Press.

Pugh-Kitingan, Jacqueline. (2004). Selected Papers on Music in Sabah. Kota Kinabalu: Kadazandusun Chair, Universiti

Malaysia Sabah.

AA31103 CONTEMPORARY SOCIETY IN SOUTHEAST ASIA

This course is designed to give students an understanding of current contemporary issues among societies in Southeast Asia.

The focus of discussion are typical issues faced by developing countries, such as the legacies of colonialism, ethnicity and

identity, migration, nation-building and the impact of globalization.

References

Anderson, Benedict. (1983). Imagined Communities: Reflections on the Origin of and Spread of Nationalism. London: Verso.

King, Victor T. & Wilder, W. (eds.) (1982). Special Focus on Ethnicity in Southeast Asia. Southeast Asian Journal of Social

Sciences, 10(1).

Sardesai, D.R. (1989). Southeast Asia. Past and Present. Hampshire, London: Macmillan.

Scott, James C. (1976). The Moral Economy of the Peasant: Rebellion and Subsistence in Southeast Asia. New Haven and

London: Yale University Press.

Walters, O.W. (1982). History, Culture and Region in Southeast Asian Perspectives. Singapore: Institute of Southeast

Asian Studies.

AA31306 PRACTICUM EXERCISE

Students are entitled to choose either one. For the Practicum Exercise, students will enroll in goverment or private

organizations and work for eight weeks. Those who choose the Academic Exercise will be required to complete a research thesis

of their own choice under a lecturer’s supervision.

Page 53: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

53

References

Gerring, J. (2001). Social Science Methodology: A Critical Framework. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Neuman, W.L.

(2003). Social Research Methods Qualitative and Quantitative Approaches.ed. Boston: Pearson Education.

Page 54: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

54

INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS PROGRAMME (HA15)

AS10103 INTRODUCTION TO INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS

This course is an introductory course to international relations. The main objective is to provide a basic knowledge in

understanding and studying international relations. Among the topics discuss are; What is the discipline of International

Relations, Historical background and the development of the discipline since early twentieth century, Realism and neo-

realism perspective, the liberal and neo-liberalism perspective, Marxist and neo-Marxist perspective, international political

structure and international security.

References

Baylis, J. & Smith, S. & Owens, P. 2005. The Globalization of World Politics: An Introduction to International

Relations, (4th edition), Oxford: Oxford University Press).

Genest, Marc, A. 2004. Conflict and Cooperation: Evolving Theories of International Relations, 2nd. Belmont: Thomson

Wadsaworth

Goldstein, J.S. & Pevehouse, J.C. 2008. International Relations, (8th edition.), New York: Pearson- Longman.***

Nye, Joseph, S. (jr.). 1993. Understanding International Conflicts: An Introduction to Theory and History, New York: Harper

Collins.

Rourke, John, T. 2005. International Politics on the World Stage, 10th ed., Boston: McGraw-Hill.

AS20103 THEORIES OF INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS

This course aims at introducing students towards theories and major approaches within the intellectual studies of international

relations discipline. In doing so, specific attention will be given in examining the main fundamental theories in International

Relations Discipline such as Realisme, Neo-Realism, idealism-liberalism, Neo-Liberalism and Globalism which also include

imperialism, hegemony, dependency, as well as world system theory.

Apart from that, the so-called alternative theories and approaches in International Relations vis-à-vis,

Constructivism, Critical Theory, and Feminism will also be discussed.

References

Acharya, A. 2010. Non-Western International Relations Theory: Perspectives on and Beyond Asia. London: Taylor

& Francis Ltd.

Burchill, S. e t . a l . 2 0 1 3 Theories of International Relations, 5th

Edition, New York: Palgrave.

Buzan, B. 2015. The Global Transformation: History, Modernity, and the Making of International Relations.

Cambridge: Cambridge University Press

Dunne, T. et.al. 2016.International Relations Theories: Discipline and Diversity. 4th

Edition. Oxford: Oxford

University Press.

Jackson, R. dan Sorensen G. 2016. Introduction to International Relations: Theories and Approaches. 6th

Edition.

New York: Oxford University Press.

AS10203 INTRODUCTION TO INTERNATIONAL POLITICAL ECONOMY

This course is an introductory course to the international political economy. The main objective is to provide a basic

knowledge in understanding and studying international political economy. Among the topics discuss are; What is IPE,

Page 55: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

55

Mercantilism and economic Nationalism, the liberal perspective, Marxist perspective, international trade, international

monetary and finance structure, the economic and politics of regionalism, international development and North-South

Relations.

References

Acharya, A. 2013. The Making of Southeast Asia. Ithaca: Cornell University Press.

Balaam, D. & D i l l m a n , B . 2013, Introduction to International Political Economy. L o n d o n : Ta y l o r & F r a n c i s

L t d . Prentice Hall.

Blyth, M. 2010. The Routledge Handbook of International Political Economy (IPE): IPE as a Gobal Conversation.

London: Taylor & Francis Ltd

Paul, D.E & Abla. A (eds) 2010. The Theoretical Evolution of International Political Economy: A Reader. 3rd

Edition. New York: Oxford

University Press Inc.

Phillips, N. 2011. Migration in the Global Political Economy. Boulder: Lynne Rienner Publishers Inc.

AS20203 PUBLIC INTERNATIONAL LAW

This course covers the legal system that sought to govern inter-state relations. The syllabus encompasses topics such as the

theories and the basis of the international legal system, its basic principles and the political and economic context in which the

system operates. Students will be initially introduced to the characteristics and the sources of public international law. The

course will then discuss the importance of public international in promoting as well as maintaining harmonious inter-

state relations In the later topics, students will be exposed to the traditional principles and doctrines of international law. The

relationship between international law and municipal law will also be covered. The next topic on the list is the subject of

international law. In this topic, particular emphasis will be given to the rights and responsibilities of ‘states’ as the main

subject of international law. To further develop students’ understanding in this aspect, the next topic will cover state recogni- tion.

In this topic, several variations of recognition will be discussed in detail. The last few topics will discuss territorial acqui- sition,

state and diplomatic immunity. As a whol e, this course shall emphasis on the important role played by the state as the main

subject of international law. However, other important subjects such as international organizations and individuals will also be

discussed.

References

Beeson, S. & Tasioulas, J. 2010. The Philosophy of International Law. Oxford: Oxford University Press Crawford, J. 2012.

Brownlie’s Principles of Public International Law. 8th

edition. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Giliker, P. et.al. 2010. Cases and

Materials on International Law. 8th

edition. London: Sweet & Maxwell Kaczorowska, A. 2010. Public International Law. 4th

Edition.

London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

Shaw, M. N. 2015. International Law. 7th

Edition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

AS20303 INTERNATIONAL ORGANISATIONS

This course will expose students to the importance of international organisations as an actor in international relations. This course

will firstly cover its historical background, its role and function in contemporary world politics. Students will be exposed to

various theoretical approaches such as realism, liberalism, marxism and feminism in order to analyze multilateral cooperation and

factors that lead to formation of international regime. This course will then delve into the role of international organizations in

issues like regional security, commerce, human rights and the environment. At this stage, students will be introduced to

the different types of international organizations that consist of both governmental and non-governmental organizations.

Lastly, this course will analyze the importance and the achievement of the United Nations (UN) as a prominent multi-functional

Page 56: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

56

international organization the modern world today.

References

Archer, C. and Marsden, L. 2015. International Organisations. 4th

Edition. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

Frederking, B. & Diehl, P. 2015. The Politics of Global Governance: International Organisations in an Interdependent

World. 5th

Edition. Boulder: Lynne Rinner Publishing

Hurd, I. 2012. International Organizations: Politics, Law, Practice. 2nd

Edition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Ryngaert, C. et.al. (eds) 2016. Judicial Decisions on the Law of International Organisations. Oxford: Oxford University Press

Weiss, T. & Wilkinson, R. (eds) 2013. International Organisations and Global Governance. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

AS20403 INTERNATIONAL CONFLICT MANAGEMENT AND NEGOTIATION

The course focus on the questions of conflicts and resolutions methods applies at the international level. The fundamental

questions of conflicts vis-à-vis, what is conflict and to what extent that a particular conflict affected the development of

international politics are the key philosophical inquiry addressed. In doing so, the focal differences of a basic concept of

international conflicts among others are dispute, crisis, tension and war will be discussed. Apart from that, major approaches used

in solving international conflicts such as conflict prevention, conflict management, conflict settlement, conflict resolu- tion and

conflict transformation will also be discussed.

References

Aall, P. et al. (eds) 2017. International Negotiation and Mediation of Violent Conflict. Context is everything. London: Taylor &

Francis Ltd.

Agier, M. 2011. Managing the Undesirables.Refugee Camps and Humanitarian Governments. Oxford: Polity Press Arbinger

Institute. 2016. The Anatomy of Peace: How to Resolve the Heart of Conflict. London: Penguin Books Ltd. Andrews, J. 2016 . The

World in Conflict: Understanding the World’s Troublespots. London: Profile Books Ltd. Zartman, I.W. 2009. Negotiation and

Conflict Management. Essays on theory and practice. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

AS20503 FOREIGN POLICY ANALYSIS

The course introduces students to concepts, approaches and theories in understanding the formulation of foreign policy.

The survey will be made through individual, state andsystemic analysis. Discussion also includes actors involved in foreign policy

decision-making among others; president, prime minister, foreign minister, foreign ministry, financial/economic ministries, media,

interest & pressure gr oup, opposition parties, MNC’s, NGO’s and public opinion. Students will also make comparison decision-

making process of several countries. By following this course, students will be able to understand how and why foreign policy is

been formulated.

References

Alden, C. & Aran, A. 2016. Foreign Policy Analysis: New Approaches. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

Hudson, V. M. 2013. Foreign Policy Analysis, Classic and Contemporary Theory. 2nd

Edition. Lanham: Rowman &

Littlefield Publishers.

Shimko, K. 2015. The Foreign Policy Puzzle: Interests, Threats and Tools. USA: Oxford University Press

Smith, S. et. al.2016. Foreign Policy: Theories, Actors, Cases. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Walker, S.G et. Al. 2011. Rethinking Foreign Policy Analysis: States, Leaders and the Microfoundations of

Behavioural International Relations. London: Taylor & Francis

Page 57: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

57

AS20603 EUROPEAN UNION

This course introduces to the students European political development with the emergence of the integration idea after the end of

the Second World War until the formation of European Union in the 1990s. It emphasized to important events, leaders involved

and the formation of institutions. Among the topics discussed: the development of EU since 1950s, institutions, EU enlargement,

common foreign and security policy, single market, EMU, EU’s involvement in the Balkan crisis, migration and refugees, relations

with ASEAN, human rights and the future of EU.

References

Corbett, et,al 2016. The European Parliament. London: John Harper Publishing

Hill, C. & Smith, M. 2016. International Relations and the European Union.

Howorth, J. 2014. Security and Defence Policy in the European Union. Basingstoke: Palgrave MacMillan McCormick, J. 2011.

Understanding the European Union: A Concise Introduction. Oxford: Oxford University Press Nugent, N. 201. The Government

and Politis of the European Union. Basingstoke: Palgrave MacMillan

AS20803 INTERNATIONAL POLITICS OF THE ASIA PACIFIC

This course discusses the international political development in the Asia Pacific region after 1945 (after the end of the

Second World War). The emphasise will be given to the Northeast and Southeast Asian region. The major objective of the

course is to understand the dynamics of international politics in the Asia Pacific, especially the interaction of states and in

particular the interaction of the major powers (The United states, China, Japan and Soviet Union/Russia) in the power

configuration in the region.

References

Bateman, S. & Emmers, Ralf. 2012. Security and International Politics in the South China Sea: Towards a Co-

operative Management Regime. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

Connors, M. et. al. 2011. The New Global Politics of the Asia Pacific. 2nd

Edition. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd. McDougall,D.

2016. Asia Pacific in World Politics. Boulder: Lynne Rienner Publishers Inc.

Tan, S.S. 2013. The Making of the Asia Pacific:Knowledge Brokers and the Politics of Representation. Amsterdam: Amsterdam

University Press

Yahuda, M. 2011. The International Politics of the Asia Pacific: Since 1945. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

AS21003 ARAB-ISRAELI CONFLICT

This course discusses the conflict between Arabs and the Israeli people in Palestine. The main focus of the discussion will be

from the establishment of the State of Israel in 1948 and onwards. Since the existence of the State of Israel in Palestine, a

few wars between Arabs and the Israeli people erupted. Several peace treaties also have been signed by both parties to end

the conflict. However, the conflict is still yet to be resolved. Therefore, it is the main task of this course to give an exposure

to the students the underlying background of the conflict. Throughout the course, the students are expected to be able to display

an analytical viewpoint and to suggest a number of sound resolutions in managing the conflict.

References

Bickerton, I. J. & Klausner, C.L. 2014. A History of the Arab Israeli Conflict. United States: Taylor & Francis Inc.

Cleveland, W.L. & Bunton, M. 2015. A History of Modern Middle East. Boulder: The Perseus Books Group

Gelvin, J.L. 2015. The Arab Uprisings: What Everyone Needs to Know. Oxford: Oxford University Press

McAleavy, T. 2014. The Arab-Israeli Conflict. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press

Page 58: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

58

Smith, S.D. 2016. Palestine and the Arab-Israeli Conflict: A History of Documents. New York: Macmillan

Higher Education

AS21203 INTERNATIONAL POLITICS OF AUSTRALASIA

This course discusses the imperative issues pertaining to the affairs of Australasian region. Specific interest is given to

Australia, New Zealand, Papua New Guinea and Fiji from which historical, political and economic issues are discussed. This

course shall also explore into the important elements of international system that shape the contemporary Australasian

region.

References

Baldwin, R. 2016. The Great Convergence: Information Technology and the New Globalisation. Cambridge: Harvard

University Press.

Cook, T. 2013. The Exploration of Australasia and the Pacific. New York: Gareth Stevens Publishing

Europa Publications, 2017. The Far East and Australasia 2016 . London: Taylor & Francis Ltd

Jessup, B. 2015. The State. Oxford: Polity Press

Hawksley, C. & Georgeou.N. 2017. Police Building and the Responsibility to Protect: Civil Soceity, Gender & Human

Rights Culture in Oceania. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

Sprague, J. 2015. Globalisation and Transnational Capitalism in Asia and Oceania. London: Taylor & Fancis Ltd

AS30103 INTERNATIONAL SECURITY

This course aims at introducing students on the questions of international security as fundamental elements within the

intellectual discourse of international relations. As intellectually known within the rubric of international relations discipline,

security is among classic theme that received special attention among scholars alike. In other words, the question of security is

developing parallel with the complex development of international system itself. Therefore, for the purposes of conducting the

said course, students will be introduce and guide into three different phase of discussion; the first phase will be focused on the

historical thought of security and many philosophies that exist under the corpus of international relations studies; second

phase, the discussion will be center around political thought of security championed by state-centered analysis; and the third

phase, will be given special attention towards contemporary thinking of security to date.

References

Buzan, B & Hansen, L. 2010. The Evolution of International Security Studies. Cambridge: Cambridge University

Press

Collins, A. 2016. Contemporary Security Studies. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Dannreuther,R. 2016. International Security: The Contemporary Agenda. Oxford: Polity Press

Fierke, K.M. 2016. Critical Approaches to International Security. Oxford: Polity Press

Hough, P. et.al. 2015. International Security Studies:: Theory and Practice. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

AS30503 INTERNATIONAL POLITICS OF THE MIDDLE EAST

This course analyzes the Middle Eastern states’ reactions towards a number of issues and conflicts in the Middle East region in

the post-World War II and onwards. The discussion of the course is divided into three main themes. Firstly; to study the early

emergence of the Middle Eastern states in the modern international political system, secondly; to address a few major issues and

conflicts in the Cold War era, and thirdly; to foresee a number of potential challenges that might influence the character of the

Page 59: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

59

Middle Eastern states in the future.

References

Dingel, E. 2017. Power Struggles in the Middle East: The Islamist Politics of Hizbullah and Muslim Brotherhood. London: I.B.

Tauris & Co.Ltd.

Kamrava, M. 2016 (ed) Fragile Politics: Weak States in the Greater Middle East. London: C.Hurst & Co. Publishers Ltd.

Macqueen, B. 2013. An Introduction to Middle East Politics: Continuity, Change, Conflict and Co-operation. London: Sage

Publications.

Mansour, I. 2016. Statecraft in the Middle East: Foreign Policy, Domestic Politics and Security. London: I.B. Tauris & Co. Ltd.

Wehrey, F.M. 2016. Sectarian Politics in the Gulf: From the Iraq War to the Arab Uprisings. New York: Cloumbia University

Press

AS30603 ASIA AND INTERNATIONAL TRADE

The main thrust of this course is the relationship between international trade and countries in Asia. As an introduction, the course

will discuss the meaning of international trade and its importance to the international society. In other words, this course

seek to expose to the students the structure of international trade, the underlying principles of international trade as well as

international organizations that are involved in international trade. At the same time, this course also discloses to the students the

legal principles, rules and regulation that regulate international trade. In order to examine the relationships between

international trade and countries in Asia, this course will use countries such as China, India and Malaysia as case-study.

References

Pomfret, R. 2015 (ed) Trade in Asia. Cheltenham: Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd.

Findlay, C. & Urata, S. 2010. (eds) Free Trade Agreements in the Asia Pacific. Singapore: World Scientific

Publishing Co Pte Ltd

Kim, J. 2017. Japan and East Asian Integration: Trade and Domestic Politics. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd. Thanh, T.V 2010 (ed)

International Institutions and Economic Development in Asia. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd

United Nations. 2012. Fighting Irrelevance: The Role of Regional Trade Agreements in International Production

Networks in Asia. New York: United Nations

AS30703 ASEAN: PRESENT AND BEYOND

This course looks at the development of ASEAN since its inception in 1967 to the present time. As a organization, ASEAN has

been seen as the most successful in maintaining peace in the region. However ASEAN has been criticized of late due to its

stand not to change especially by the Western powers. ASEAN has in fact faced many challenges during the Post-Cold

War era with issues like Timor Timur, Myanmar, security, trade & investment, environment, migration, claims and counter

claims and relations with big powers.

References

Jetin, B. & Mikic, M. 2016 (eds) ASEAN Economic Community 2016: A Model for Asia-Wide Regional Integration?

Basingstoke: Palgrave MacMillan

Jones, L. 2012. ASEAN, Sovereignty and Intervention in Southeast Asia. Basingstoke: Palgrave MacMillan

Katsumata, H. 2010. ASEAN’s Cooperative Security Enterprise 2009: Norms and Interests in the ASEAN Regional

Forum. Basingstoke: Palgrave MacMillan

Mahbubani, K. 2017. The ASEAN Miracle: A Catalyst for Peace. Singapore: NUS Press

Roberts, C. 2013. ASEAN Regionalism: Cooperation, Values and Institutionalisation. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

Page 60: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

60

AS30903 INTERNATIONAL HUMANITARIAN LAW

The course explores the development and operation of International humanitarian Law (IHL) which is the body of international

law that regulates the conduct of armed conflict. This course shall provide an overview of historical, traditional, and

contemporary aspects of international humanitarian law. Topics to be discussed include the application of IHL towards

combatants and non-combatants, methods and means of warfare, prisoners of war, protection of civilians, women and

children. The course shall also analyse the role played by international organizations and institutions such as the United

Nations and International Committee of the Red Cross.

References

Cantor, D. & Durieux, J. 2014. Refuge from Inhumanity ? War Refugees and International Humanitarian La Cheltenham,

Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd.

Crawford, E. & Pert, A. @015. International Humanitarian Law. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Crowe, J. & Weston-Scheuber, K. 2015. Principles of International Law. Cheltenham: Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd. Othman, M.C.

2010. Accountability for International Humanitarian Law Violations: The Case of Rwanda and East Timor. Berlin: Springer-

Verlag Berlin and Heidelberg GmbH & Co.

Watson, S. 2013. The Securitization of Humanitarian Migration: Digging Moats and Sinking Boats. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

AS31003 ISSUES IN WORLD POLITICS

This course shall survey the major theories, themes, and issues in the study of international politics. We will begin with an

overview of the major contending explanations of how states interact with one another, and then continue with a study of the

various forms of violence in the international system. The course will also examine current issues in world politics that include

terrorism, globalization, human security, and humanitarian interventions.

References

Beeson, M. et. al. 2016. Issues in 21st

Century World Politics. Basingstoke: Palgrave MacMillan.

Caldwell, D. & Williams, R. 2016. Seeking Security in an Insecure World. Lanham: Rowman & Littlefield Publishers

Gertheiss, S. & Wolf. K.D. 2017. Resistance and Change in World Politics: International Dissidence. Cham: Springer

International Publishingh AG.

Jackson, P. 2016. Balance of Power. Cambridge: Cambridhe University Press.

Weatherby, J.N. et.al. 2017. The Other World: Issues and Politics in the Developing World. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

AS21403 THE POLITICS OF ALLIANCE

The course explores into the actions and reactions of states at the international stage towards challenges that may affect

their interests. Several concepts such as Balance of Power and Bandwagon are used to assess how states respond to

circumstances that threatens their security.

References

Darnton, C. 2014. Rivalry and Alliance Politics in Cold War Latin America. Baltimore: John Hopkins University Press

DeConde, A. 2012. Entangling Alliance: Politics and Diplomacy Under George Washington. Whitefish: Literarcy Licensing

Mattox, G.A & Grenier, S.M. 2015. Coalition Chellenges in Afghanistan: The Politics of Alliance. Palo Alto: Stanford University

Press

Snyder, G.H. 2007. Alliance Politics. Ithaca: Cornell University Press

Yeager, M. & Carter, C. 2012. Pacts and Alliances in History: Diplomatic Strategy and the Politics of Coalition. London: I.B.

Page 61: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

61

Tauris & Co.Ltd.

AS30403 U.S. RELATIONS WITH ASIA

This course will expose students about the Asia-U.S. relations. This course is very important for students to understand

and to explore the Asian rising power and the response of U.S foreign policy.

This course aims to expose students to the political power of Asian and the Asia-U.S. relations, develop knowledge and ability to

analyze the causes of the Asian rising power and the response of the U.S and encourage students to explain the emerging

powers in Asia and it’s implication in U.S Foreign policy in writing as well as in oral presentation.

References

William Chapin. 2006. The Asian Balance of Power: An American View. The Geopolitics of East and Southeast Asia: Volume I.

Routledge. New York.

Willem van Kemenade. 2008. Detente between China and India: The Delicate Balance of Geopolitics in Asia. Netherlands

Institute of International Relations ‘Cingendael’. Hague.

Leslie H. Brown. 2006. American Security Policy in Asia. The Geopolitics of East and Southeast Asia: Volume I. Routledge.

New York.

Asia’s International Role in the Post-Cold War Era (Part I & Part II). The Geopolitics of East and Southeast Asia: Volume II.

Bernard K. Gordon (ed.) 2006. Routledge. New York.

Towards a New Balance of Power in Asia.The Geopolitics of East and Southeast Asia: Volume II. Bernard K. Gordon (ed.)

2006. Routledge. New York.

Matthieu Bussiere. China and India’s Roles in Global Trade and Finance: Twin Titans for the Millenium?

Occasional Paper Series No. 80/ January 2008. European Cenral Bank. Euro System Germany And also other books, journal or

articles related to this course.

AS30803 RELIGIOUS AND ETHNIC CONFLICT

The purpose of this course is to introduce students to the approaches to define and describe the approaches in the study of

religious and ethnic conflict, explain about international intervention and the management of international crisis as well as

relate the knowledge of religious and ethnic conflict to the issues, analyze, build new ideas and give opinions regarding the

issues.

References

Chorit, D. 2011. Contentious Identities:Ethnic, Religious and National Conflicts in Today’s World. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

Cordell, K. & Wolff, S. 2012. Routledge Handbook of Ethnic Conflict. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd. Cordell, K. & Wolff, S. 2010.

Ethnic Conflict: Causes, Consequences & Responses. Oxford: Polity Press

Finlay, A. 2012. Governing Ethnic Conflict: Consociation, Identity and the Price of Peace. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

Jesse, N.G. & Williams, K.P. 2010. Ethnic Conflict: A systemic Approach to Cases of Conflict. Alexandria: Sage Publications

Inc.

AS32206 PRACTICAL TRAINING

As part of their final year project, all final year students from the International Relations Programme are required to choose either

to register for AS32506 Academic Exercise or AS32206 Practical Training in order to fulfil their requirement for graduation.

Practical training is a minimum 8 week long attachment with an industry, intended to expose students towards working

Page 62: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

62

environment, as well as to provide an in-depth exploration of a symbiosis relations between knowledge learned at philosophical

level with jobs market. In doing so, students will work closely with their academic advisor and industrial advisor. Upon completion

the training, students are required to submit a comprehensive written report as well as make an oral presentation of the research

results in front of a professional academic panel.

References

Baird,B. 2013 Internship, Practicum and Field Placement. United States: Taylor & Francis Inc. Fulkerson, S. 2015. The Coffee Run

and other Internship Need-to-knows. San Francisco: Inkshares Robinson, F. 2015. Internship Journal: Keep Record of your

Internship Duties. United States: Createspace

Woodard,E. Et.al. 2012. Why Internships are Good: The Best Education Money Can’t Buy. United States: Createspace

AS31403 INTERNATIONAL POLITICS OF EAST ASIA

This course will expose students to the comprehensively study of International politics of the Eastern Asia. This course is

very important for students to understand and explore the Eastern Asia as a regional study.

Among the aims of the course is to expose students to the political system and the political power of the Eastern Asia region in

the international system and develop knowledge on the Eastern Asia’s strength in terms of economy, technology and military

capabilities.

References

Ba, A. D. et.al. (eds) 2016. Institutionalising East Asia:Mapping and Reconfiguring Regional Cooperation. London: Taylor &

Francis Ltd.

Beeson, M. 2014. Regionalism and Globalisation in East Asia: Politics, Security and Economic Development. 2nd

Edition.

Basingstoke: Palgrave MacMillan

Emmers, R. (ed) 2010. Geopolitics and Maritime Territorial Disputes in East Asia. New York: Taylor & Francis Ltd Lim, T. 2014.

Politics in East Asia: Explaining Change & Continuity. Boulder: Lynne Rienner Publishers Inc.

Peou, S. (ed) 2010.Human Security in East Asia: Challenges for collaborative Action. New York.: Taylor & Francis Ltd

AS31503 GLOBAL ENVIRONMENTAL POLITICS

This course is focussed on the various environmental problems that are shared by international community as a whole. The main

environmental issues that will be discussed are climate change, species extinction and biodiversity. The scientific

arguments of those issues will not be covered, instead emphasis will be on how international actors acted upon these

issues by holding discussions and implementing environmental regimes. This course also discusses the roles play by actors

and non-states actors in establishing various environmental

regimes. The pertinent question that needs to be addressed is whether it would be possible for more than 190 states and

non-states actors to work together in managing environmental problems effectively.

References

Akhtarkhavari, A. 2011. Global Governance of the Environment: Environmental Principles and Change in International

Law and Politics. Cheltenham: Edward Elgar Publishing Ltd.

Anderson, M. (ed) 2011. The Politics of Saving the Environment. New York: Rosen Education Service

Connelly, J. et.al. 2012. Politics and the Environment: From Theory to Practice. 3rd

Edition. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

Detraz, N. 2016. Gender and the Environment. Chicester: Wiley-Blackwell Ltd

Doyle, T. et.al. 2015. Environment and Politics. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

Page 63: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

63

AS31603 HUMAN RIGHTS

This course examines the gradual construction of an international human rights regime and its influence on international

politics. The course seeks to understand how and why human rights standards have come into being and how they change over

time. The course will survey the actors and organizations, including states, international organizations, and non-state actors,

involved in the promotion of human rights around the globe, as well as obstacles to such promotion.

References

Alston, P. & Goodman, R. 2012. International Human Rights. Oxford: Oxford Univeristy Press

Clapham, A. 2016. Human Rights: A Very Short Introduction. Oxford: Oxford University Press

Donelly, J. 2013. Universal Human Rights In Theory And Practice. 3rd

Edition. Ithaca: Cornell University Press

Moyn, S. 2014. Human Rights and the Uses of History. London: Verso Books

Smith, R. 2016. Textbook on Human Rights. 7th

Edition. Oxford: Oxford University Press

AS31703 HISTORY OF DIPLOMACY

The purpose of this course is to introduce students to the history of diplomacy and gain an understanding of how states

pursue their national interest in a complex and conflictual world without resorting to war. This course aims expose students to

the evolution of diplomacy as a tool of foreign policy and develop knowledge on the causes of the failures of diplomacy.

References

Berridge, G.R. 2015. Diplomacy: Theory and Practice. 5th

Edition. Basingstokes: Palgrave MacMillan

Cooper, A. et.al. (eds) 2015.. The Oxford Handbook of Modern Diplomacy. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Jones, P. 2015.

Track Two Diplomacy in Theory and Practice. Palo Alto: Stanford University Press

Kerr, J. & Wiseman, G. 2012. Diplomacy in a Globalising World: Theories and Practices. New York: Oxford University

Press.

Pigman, G. 2011. Contemporary Diplomacy. Oxford: Polity Press

AS31803 INTERNATIONAL POLITICS OF THE UNITED STATES

The purpose of this course is to introduce students significant events that have shaped the thinking of US foreign policy

making leading it to become the most important actor in the international system today. Emphasis will be on factors that

drove the US to end its period of isolation from world affairs to its current position as a leader with no equals. This course

aims Assess the problems facing the US in its conduct of foreign policy and situate the US as a diverse and powerful nation in

the international context of other states, nations, transnational actors and international organizations.

References

Carter, R.G. (ed) 2014. Contemporary Cases in U.S. Foreign Policy: From Terrorism to Trade. Washington: Sage Publication

Inc.

Clementi, M. et.al. (eds). 2017. US Foreign Policy in a Changing World: Building Order on Shifting

Foundations.Switzerland: Springer International Publishing AG

Cox, M. & Stokes, D. (eds). 2012. US Foreign Policy. 2nd

Edition. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Davis, R. T. 2010. U.S. Foreign

Policy and National Security. Westport: Praeger Publishers Inc.

Inbar, E. & Rynhold, J. (eds) 2016. US Foreign Policy and Global Standing in the 21st

Century: Realities and

Page 64: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

64

Perceptions. London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

AS31903 INTERNATIONAL POLITICS OF LATIN AMERICA

This course aims at exposing students towards understanding both—abstract and empiric—international political

development of Latin America. Among aspects that will touched is on the roles of regional powers such as Argentina, Brazil,

Venezuela, Chile, Cuba, Mexico and world super-power vis-à-vis, USA, Russia, United

Kingdom, China, during and after cold war era. Apart from that, the course also discusses the USA political influence with

regards to the political-economy relation, military involvement as well as environmental issues in the region. Besides that,

this course will also look and analyze the future international political scenario of the region in the light of the newly emerging

international political actors to date.

References

Gomez-Mera, L. 2013. Power and Regionalism in Latin America: The Politics of Mercosur. Notre Dame: University

of Notre Dame Press

Hellinger, D.C. 2015. Comparative Politics of Latin America: Democracy at Last? 2nd

Edition.London: Taylor & Francis Ltd.

Kaplan, S.B. 2013. Globalisation and Austerity Politics in Latin America. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press

Levine, D.H. 2012. Politics, Religion and Society in Latin America. Boulder: Lynne Rienner Publishers Inc. Vanden, H.E. &

Prevost, G. 2014. Politics of Latin America: The Power Game. New York: Oxford University Press

AS32506 ACADEMIC EXERCISE

Research is a main practical task for International Relations students. This course was designed for 3rd year students to study

international issues and phenomenons. The course will develop knowledge in data collection, develop skills of

analyzing data as well as to develop report writing skills.

References

Bryman, A. 2016. Social Research Methods. 6th

Edition. Oxford: Oxford University Press

Creswell, J.W. 2014. A Concise Introduction to Mixed Methods Research. USA: Sage Publications Inc

Lamont, C. 2015. Research Methods in International Relations. London: Sage Publications Ltd

Matthews, B. & Ross, L. 2010. Research Methods: A Practical Guide for the Social Sciences. Harlow: Pearson

Education Limited.

Yin, R.K. 2015. Case Study Research: Design & Methods. 5th

Edition. United States: Sage Publications Inc.

Page 65: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

65

GEOGRAPHY PROGRAMME (HA18)

AG20503 HYDROLOGY AND WATER CATCHMENT

This course discusses water as an essential component of the physical environment. The distribution and movement of

water will be discussed including the hydrological processes involved through a system approach, particularly in watersheds. The

process of hydrology includes precipitation, interception, evaporation and evapotranspiration, runoff and river discharge and

infiltration and groundwater. Due to the water impact on the development of a society, a number of issues related to water

resources will also be discussed. These include supply and demand of water resources, the effects of development on water

quality and quantity and the integrated management needs. Students will be exposed with statistical techniques to analyze the

data of hydrology and water resources as a complementary of the course.

References

Chang, M. (2013). Forest hydrology: an introduction to water and forests. 3rd

Ed. CRC press. Davie, T. (2008). Fundamentals of

Hydrology. 2nd

Ed.. New York : Routledge.

Dunne, T., & Leopold, L. B. (1978). Water in environmental planning. San Francisco : Freeman & Co.

Musy, A., & Higy, C. . (2011). Hydrology: a science of nature. Science Publishers.

Schelwald-van der Kley, A. L., & Reijerkerk, L. (2009). Water: A way of life: Sustainable water management in a cultural

context. CRC Press.

Thompson, S.A. 1999. Hydrology For Water Management. Netherlands: A.A. Balkema Publ. Wan Ruslan Ismail. (1994). Pengantar

Hidrologi. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Ward, A. D., & Trimble, S. W. (2003). Environmental hydrology. CRC Press.

AG30503 RIVER BASIN AND MANAGEMENT

This course discusses the concept of river basin and how it is used as a basis in environmental management. The course is

divided into three parts. The first part will focus on the concept of drainage basin and processes hydrogeomorphology in the

basin area. The second part will focus on the issues of water resources in the river

basin. Among the issues covered include the threat of drought and flooding, erosion and sedimentation of rivers as well as water

pollution. The third part will look at the mechanisms that can be used to manage and resolve issues related to river basins. It

covers the management of legislative and non-legislative approach and integrated river basin management (IRBM).

References

Arnell, N. (2014). Hydrology and global environmental change. New York : Routledge.

Brooks, K. N., Ffolliott, P. F., & Magner, J. A. (2013). Hydrology and the Management of Watersheds. 4th

Ed. John Wiley & Sons.

DeBarry, P. A. (2004). Watersheds: processes, assessment, and management . Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons. Kemper, K. E.,

Blomquist, W. A., & Dinar, A. (2007). Integrated river basin management through decentralization . Berlin: Springer.

Rapport, D. J., Lasley, B. L., Rolston, D. E., Nielsen, N. O., Qualset, C. O., & Damania, A. B.

(Eds.). (2003). Managing for healthy ecosystems. CRC Press.

AG20403 INTRODUCTION TO REMOTE SENSING AND GIS

This course is an anvance for AG10403 Introduction to remote sensing and gis. In this course student will be learn the

computerized mapping technique and understanding how map provide information attribute for planning and manage- ment. This

course shall be divided into treble portion. First part covers data management. Second part is manipulation and analysis of data.

While in the third part students will be covered the data attribute.

Page 66: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

66

References

ArcGIS User Guide (Versi online/Digital)

Gurnell, A.M. and Montgomery, D.R., 2000, Hydrological Applications of GIS, USA: New York, 176 p Lyon, J.G.

2003. Gis for Water Resources and Watershed Management. London: CRC Prl Lic. 288 p. MapINFO. 1998, Map Info

Profesional: User’s Guide, New York, 589 p

Nordin S, Mustapa, A.T, Muhammad Tahir M, Aliakbar G & Samsam A. 2009. Sistem Maklumat Ruangan: Teknik

Penginputan Data Geografi. Kota Kinabalu: Program Geografi & CeRGIS, UMS. 110ms

R2V Manual (Versi online/Digital)

AG10303 PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY ELECTIVE CODE: AZ11303

This is the fundemental course for physical Geography students to understand the component of atmosphere, hydro-

sphere, lithosphere and biosphere. Tumpuan kursus meliputi aspek-aspek persekitaran fizikal yang merangkumi kompo- nen-

komponen atmosfera, hidrosfera, litosfera dan biosfera. Students will discuss the physical forms and processess in general

according to the sub-system. This course also focus on the natural landscape pattern from various topical approaches.

References

Huggett, R., et al. (2004). Physical Geography: a Human Perspective. London: Arnold Publishers McKnight, T.L., (1996).

Physical Geography: a Landscape Appreciation. 5th ed. New Jersey: Prentice Hall

Pacione, M., (1999). Applied Geography: Principles and Practice: An Introduction to Useful Research in Physical, Environ-

mental and Human Geography. London: Routledge

Strahler, A.H., (2001). Physical Geography: Science and Systems of the Human Environment. 2nd ed. New York: John Wiley &

Sons

Strahler, A.H. & Strahler, A. (2002). Introduction Physical Geography. 2nd ed. New York: John Wiley & Sons

AG10203 MAPPING & MAP INTERPRETATION

This course is offered to train the students of the importance of mapping and map interpretation in various related fields. Students

will be exposed with cartography and graphic techniques to understand each element especially symbols interpretation found in

maps, plan, diagram, etc. This course covers drawing of maps, map charts, symbols, and map analysis using GiS

software. The understanding of this course will produce creative and innovative students in implement- ing all the techniques

given.

References

Abdul Samad Hadi, 1995, Panduan Kajilidikan Geografi, Penerbit Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia, Bangi. Campbell, J., 1991,

Introduction Cartography, Wm.C. Brown Publisher, USA.

David J. Cuff & Mark T. Mattson (terjemahan Mohd Safie Mohd), 1993, Peta Tematik, Rekabentuk dan Pengeluaran, Dewan

Bahasa Dan Pustaka, Kuala Lumpur.

Foziah Johar, 1992, Pengenalan Kartografi Untuk Perancang Bandar, Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka, Kuala Lumpur. MacEachren,

A.M., and Taylor,D.R.F., 1994, Visualization in Modern Cartography, Pergamon, New York.

Tomlin, C.D., 1990, Geographic Information Systems and Cartographic Modelling, Prentice Hall, Eaglewood

Cliffs, New Jersey.

Wood, C.H. and Keller, C.P., 1996, Cartographic Design: Theoritical and Practical Perspectives, John Wiley and

Sons Inc, London.

Page 67: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

67

AG20103 GEOGRAPHY RESEARCH METHODOLOGY

This course emphasizes basic research in the field of geography. Basic scientific research will be introduced with the problem

identification, synthesizing literature review, data collection and analysis, as well as presentation of research findings. Students will

also be exposed to the procedure of preparation of research proposals and techniques of statistical and spatial analysis in a

scientific research. Among the statistical techniques that will be explored in this course such as descriptive and inferential analysis

as well as spatial analysis techniques using geographic information technologies.

References

Abdul Samad Hadi (1995). Panduan Kajilidikan Geografi. Bangi: Penerbit UKM

Acevedo, M. F. (2012). Data Analysis and Statistics for Geography, Environmental Science, and Engineering. CRC Press.

Burt, J. E., Barber, G. M., & Rigby, D. L. (2009). Elementary statistics for geographers. Guilford Press.

Clifford, N., Cope, M., Gillespie, T., & French, S. (Eds.). (2016). Key methods in geography. Sage.

Gomez, B., & Jones III, J. P. (2010). Research methods in geography: A critical introduction. John Wiley & Sons. McCarroll, D.

(2016). Simple Statistical Tests for Geography. CRC Press.

Oyana, T. J., & Margai, F. (2015). Spatial analysis: statistics, visualization, and computational methods. CRC Press. Walford, N.

(2011). Practical statistics for geographers and earth scientists. John Wiley & Sons.

AG20303 COASTAL MANAGEMENT

This course is offered to stress seashore zone system from processes aspect which occurred in seashore. Learning

focus covered five main part namely seashore geomorphology and terminology, factor and process in seashore, seashore

landform, material nature coast, sediment division and budget beach and seashore use and zone management

References

Adrian S.C. Chong, et. al. (2000). Sabah ICZM Spatial Plan 2005. Kota Kinabalu: Town and Regional Planning

Department Clark, J.R. (2000). Coastal Zone Management Handbook. London: Lewis Publishers

European Union (2000). Towards Quality Coastal Tourism. Brussels: EU Publication

Masselink, G. & Hughes, M. (2003). Introduction to Coastal and Geomorphology. New Hampshire: Arnold

Sham Sani, et al. (1993). Alam Sekitar dan Pengurusannya di Malaysia. UKM/UNESCO. Bangi: Universiti Kebangsaan

Malaysia

AG30303 CLIMATOLOGY OF THE SOUTHEAST ASIA

This course is the advanced part of the Fundamental Climatology. Students are introduced to the synoptic climate of the

lower latitude area, focussing on the Southeast Asian region. The main large-scale atmospheric forcings in this region are: the

annual monsoon cycle, and the lower frequency circulation (i.e. El Nino Southern Oscillation). The discussion will also involve

climate-related incidents such as the persistent occurence of the Southeast Asian regional haze. To back up the theoretical

understanding, this course will include fieldwork – a practical observation in the real environment.

References

Atkinson, G.D., (2002). Forecasters’ Guide to Tropical Meteorology. New York: University Press of the Pacific

Hall-Wallace, et al (2002). Exploring the Dynamic Earth: GIS Investigations for the Earth Sciences. London: Brooks Cole Hall-

Wallace, et al (2002). Exploring Tropical Cyclones: GIS Investigations for the Earth Sciences. London: Brooks Cole Kellman, M.,

& Tackaberry, R., (1997). Tropical Environments: The Functioning and Management of Tropical Ecosystems.

Page 68: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

68

London: Routledge

McGregor, G.R. & Nieuwolt, S. (1998). Tropical Climatology: An Introduction to the Climates of the Low Latitudes. 2nd ed.

New York: John Wiley & Sons, Ltd

AG20403 SPATIAL INFORMATION SYSTEM

This course is addition of AG20403 INTRODUCTION TO REMOTE SENSING AND GIS. Students will disclose with processes

spatial data input, data management and manipulating and analyzing data. Further analysis covered information searching, stack

and interception. Few environment model also will be exposed cover Model digital height (DEME), Equa-tion Model Soil

Degradation Global (ULSE) and a few other environment model.

References

Avouris, N.M. & Page, B. (eds.). (1993). Environmental Informatics: Methodology and Applications of

Environmental Information Processing. London: Kluwer Academic Publisher

Gurnel, A.M. & Montgomery, D.R. (eds.). (2000). Hydrological Applications of GIS. New York: John Wiley & Sons

Lane, S.N., Richards, K.S. & Chandler, J.H. (eds.). (1998). Landform Monitoring, Modelling and Analysis. New York: John

Wiley & Sons

Wainwright, J. & Mulligan, M. (eds.). (2004) Environmental Modelling: Finding Simplicity in Complexity. New York: John Wiley &

Sons

Wilson, J.P. & Gallant, J.C. (eds.). (2000). Terrain Analysis: Principles and Application. New York: John Wiley & Sons

AG20903 URBAN ECOSYSTEM

This subject will emphasize on the pattern and process in an urban area. The theoretical framework and basic theory for

urban development including traditional and modern theory will covered. Starting from industrial revolution, urban become

a major point for any development activities. All this activities will change the urban morfology and urban structure. Over

centralised for economic activity in an urban area is the main factor for urban evolution.

References

Armstrong, H. & Tayl, J. Regional Economic and Policy. London: Blackwell Publisher Hall, P. (2002). Urban and Regional

Planning. 4th ed. London: Routledge

Ibrahim Wahab. (1991). Perancangan Bandar: Aspek Fizikal dan Kawalan Pembangunan. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan

Pustaka

Katiman Rostam. 1988. Pengantar Geografi Bandar. Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka

Kivell, P., Roberts, P. & Walker, G.P. (1998). Environment, Planning & Land Use: Urban and Regional Planning

and Development. Aldershot: Ashgate Publishing

McCann, P. (2001). Urban and Regional Economics. London: Oxford University Press

AG21103 ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY

This course expose the students the basic principal of economic geography. This involves two parts, which is to show the link

between spatial locations with economy activities and to give examples with its connection to the global effect in world devel-

opment context.

Page 69: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

69

References

Frederick, P.S. & Anthony R. de Souza, (1998). The World Economy: Resources, Location, Trade, and

Development. 3rd ed.New Jersey: Prentice Hall

Brian, B., Edger, C. & Micheal, R. (1993). The Global Economy. New Jersey: Prentice Hall Paul, K. & John, A. (1998). The

Geography of the World Economy. 2nd ed. London: Edward Arnold Stedler, D. (2002). Geographical Grid in New Economic

Geography. London: Philip McCann Hartshorn, T.S. (1988). Economic Geography. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall

Wheeler, James O. & Muller, Peter & Thrall, Grant Ian & Fik, Timothy J. (1998), Economic Geography 3rd Edition, John Wiley &

Sons Inc.

Brakman, Steven & Garretsen, Harry & Marrewijk, Charles van (2001), An introduction to geographical economics,

Cambridge University Press.

Thrall, Grant Ian (2002), Business Geography and New Real Estate Market Analysis, Oxford University Press. Rodrigue, Jean-

Paul and Comtois, Claude (2006), The Geography of Transport System, Routledge, New York.

AG21303 GEOSPATIAL DAN MODELING

This course is offered in order to to increase understanding and application analyse information system for urban geospatial in

Malaysia. This information system converge to urban environment and province issues such as planning land used, urban

transportation, city crime and social environment system issues. Apart from that, in process exposure application strategy urban

information system focus to definition, data collection, geocoding, structuring, data analysis and visualization.

References

Huxhold, W.E. (1991). An Introduction to Urban Geographic Information Systems. London: Oxford University Press

Huxhold, W.E., Fowler. & Parr. (2004). ArcGIS and the Digital City. Redlands: ESRI Press

Longley, P.A. et al. (2004). Geographic Information Systems and Science. 2nd ed. New York: John Wiley & Sons

O’Sullivan, D. & Unwin, D. (2003). Geographic Information Analysis. New York: John Wiley & Sons

Omsby, T. et al. (2001) Getting to Know ArcGIS Desktop. Redlands: ESRI Press

AG20203 SATELLITE IMAGE PROCESSING

In this course student will be unveiled by various satellite image such as optic data and radar data which posse various

different tendency from its consumption side and application. Exposure in image processing method digit su as correction

radiometric and geometric, classification technique, technique filtering and a few particular method more far-reaching taken

from satellite also will in discuss.

References

Barreth, E.C. & Curtis, L.F. (2002). Introduction to Environmental Remote Sensing. London. Chapman & Hall

Christopher, A.L. (1995). Remote Sensing and Geographic Information System; Geological Mapping, Miner Exploration

and Mining. Chichester: John Wiley & Sons

Kramer, H.J. (1996). Observation of the Earth And It’s Environment: Survey of Missions And Sensors. Berlin: Springl

Campbell, J.B. (2002). Introduction to Remote Sensing. 3rd ed. London: The Guilford

Lillesand, T.M., Kiefer, R.W. & Chipman, J.W. (2003). Remote Sensing and Image Interpretation. 5th ed. New York: Jo Willey &

Sons.

Page 70: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

70

AG20603 GEOMORPHOLOGY

This course is introduction to form study topography. Students will be exposed of reasons having topography difference of shape.

Process approach and form used in looking see this difference. Geomorphology processes discuss on weathering, mass erosion

and movement and focus on geomorphology processess and form namely drainage basin and geomorphology geomorphology

seashore.

References

Baker, V.R., Kochel, R.C. & Patton, P.C. (1988). Flood Geomorphology. London: John Wiley & Sons Bird, E. (2000). Coastal

Geomorphology: An Introduction. London: John Wiley & Sons

Carson, M.A. & Kirkby, M.J. (1972). Hillslope Form and Process. London: Cambridge University Press Huggett, R.J. (2002).

Fundamentals of Geomorphology. Oxford: Routledge

Thomas, M.F. (1994). Geomorphology in the Tropics: A Study of Weathering and Denuation in Low Latitutes. London: John

Wiley & Sons

AG20803 BIOGEOGRAPHY

Biogeography is a study of earth system forms and processes in biosphere system. The main focus of this module is to

understand the distribution of b i o t i c a n d a b i o t i c in t h e biosphere through their interaction with the physical and

social environment, as well as to study how human manage them. At the end of this module, students are expected to

reach the ability to relate the biogeography knowledge into the reality.

References

Chan Ngai Weng, Wan Ruslan Ismail, Abibullah Samsuddin & Aziz Abdul Majid. (1993). Pengantar Geografi. Kuala

Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Gabler. R. E, Petersen. J.F dan Trapasso. L.M. (2007). Essential of Physical Geography. International Student

Edition. 8th Ed. Amerika Syarikat: Thomson Higher Education

Huggett, R.J., (2004). Fundamentals of Biogeography. 2nd

. Ed. Taylor & Francis. http://www.univpgri- palembang.ac.id/perpus-

fkip/Perpustakaan/Geography/Biogeography/Biogeography.pdf.

International Biogeography Society. (2011). Frontiers of biogeography. International Biogeography Society.

http://www.biogeography.org/html/fb/FBv03i03/FBv03i03_All.pdf.

Ismail Ahmad. (1989). Biogeografi. Kajian tentang tumbuh-tumbuhan di daratan. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan

Pustaka. Jamaluddin Jahi & Ismail Ahmad. (1987). Pengantar Geografi Fizikal. Bangi: Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia.

MacDonald, G. (2003). Biogeography, introduction to the life, space and time. United State of America: John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Tivy, Joy. (1992). Terj. Biogeografi: Kajian Tumbuhan Dalam Ekosfera. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan pustaka.

AG21003 POPULATION AND RESOURCES

The aim of this course is to introduce the dynamic relationship between population and resources, and the implications

of the relationship to the overall development. Global issues such as food crisis, poverty, international migration and sustainable

development are among the issues that will be given special attention in this course.

References

Allen, T., & Thomas, A., (ed.) (2000). Poverty and Development: Into the Twenty First Century. London: Oxford University

Press

Page 71: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

71

Lappé, F.M., et al (1998) World Hunger: Twelve Myths. New York: Grove Press

Lette, R., (1996). Malaysian Demographic Transition: Rapid Development, Culture and Politics. New York:

Mazur, L.A., (ed.) (1994). Beyond the Number. A Reader on Population, Consumption, and the Environment. New York. Island

Press

Mc Michael, P., (1996). Development and Social Change. London: Pine Forge Press

Dyson,T.,(2010). Population and Development, The Demografic Transition. London:Zed Books

AG21403 COASTAL MANAGEMENT

This course would study and reveal littoral area uniqueness inherently and suggest human tendency factor to pioneer this area

eventually will give effect to environment. At the same time, this course will introduce interest description seashore as source to

economic growth one country. Due to fugginess then integrated management methods (integrated coastal zone management

– ICZM) must introduce. A few sample of project and ICZM’s technique that had and while being implemented will study and

will be discussed.

References

Adrian S.C. Chong, et al. (2000). Sabah ICZM Spatial Plan 2005. Kota Kinabalu: Town and Regional Planning

Department Beatley T., et al. (2002). An Introduction to Coastal Zone Management. New York: Island Press

Clark, J.R. (2000). Coastal Zone Management Handbook. London: Lewis Publishers

European Union, (2000). Towards Quality Coastal Tourism. Brussels: EU Publication

Masselink, G. & Hughes, M. (2003). Introduction to Coastal and Geomorphology. New Hampshire: Arnold

AG20803 BIOGEOGRAPHY

Biogeography is a study of earth system forms and processess. The main focus of this field of study is more on understanding

the distribution of living things (plants, animal and human) in biosphere through the interactions with the physical

environment, as well as the social environment, at certain study scale. As a sub dicipline of social science area,

biogeography studies assume to be related to the social processess. Students are expose to understand the relation

between biosphere forms and processess to social processess. At the end of this module, students are expected to reach the

ability on relating the biogeography knowledge to the reality.

References

Anderson, J.M. 1981. Ecology for Environmental Sciences: Biosphere, Ecosystem and Man. London: Edward Arnold.

Billings, W.D. 1973. Plants, Man and The Ecosystem. Fundamental of Botany series. 2nd. Ed. London: The Macmillan Press LTD.

Brown, J.H. & Gibson, A.C. 1983. Biogeography. United State of America: The C.V Mosby Company.

Chan Ngai Weng, Wan Ruslan Ismail, Abibullah Samsuddin & Aziz Abdul Majid. 1993. Pengantar Geografi. Kuala Lumpur:

Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Gabler, R.E., Petersen. J.F. dan Trapasso. L.M. 2007. Essential of Physical Geography. International Student Edition. 8th

Ed.

Amerika Syarikat: Thomson Higher Education Corporation.

Gregory, K.J. & Walling, D.E. 1988. Manusia dan Proses Persekitaran. Terj. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka. Ismail

Ahmad. 1989. Biogeografi. Kajian tentang tumbuh-tumbuhan di daratan. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka. Jamaluddin

Jahi & Ismail Ahmad. 1987. Pengantar Geografi fizikal. Bangi: Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia.

MacDonald, G. 2003. Biogeography, introduction to the life, space and time. United State Of America: John Wiley and Sons,

Inc.

Page 72: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

72

Tivy, Joy. 1992. Terj. Biogeografi: Kajian Tumbuhan Dalam Ekosfera. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan pustaka.

AG21003 POPULATION AND RESOURCES

The aim of this course is to introduce the dynamic relationship between population and resources, and the implications

of the relationship to the overall development. Global issues such as food crisis, poverty, international migration and sustainable

development are among the issues that will be given special attention in this course.

References

Allen, T., & Thomas, A., (ed.) (2000). Poverty and Development: Into the Twenty First Century. London: Oxford University

Press

Lappé, F.M., et al (1998) World Hunger: Twelve Myths. New York: Grove Press

Lette, R., (1996). Malaysian Demographic Transition: Rapid Development, Culture and Politics. New York:

Mazur, L.A., (ed.) (1994). Beyond the Number. A Reader on Population, Consumption, and the Environment. New York. Island

Press

Mc Michael, P., (1996). Development and Social Change. London: Pine Forge Press

Dyson, T., (2010). Population and Development. The Demografic Transition. London: Zed Books

AG21403 COASTAL MANAGEMENT

This course would study and reveal littoral area uniqueness inherently and suggest human tendency factor to pioneer this area

eventually will give effect to environment. At the same time, this course will introduce interest description seashore as source to

economic growth one country. Due to fugginess then integrated management methods (integrated coastal zone management

– ICZM) must introduce. A few sample of project and ICZM’s technique that had and while being implemented will study and

will be discussed.

References

Adrian S.C. Chong, et al. (2000). Sabah ICZM Spatial Plan 2005. Kota Kinabalu: Town and Regional Planning

Department Beatley T., et al. (2002). An Introduction to Coastal Zone Management. New York: Island Press

Clark, J.R. (2000). Coastal Zone Management Handbook. London: Lewis Publishers

European Union, (2000). Towards Quality Coastal Tourism. Brussels: EU Publication

Masselink, G. & Hughes, M. (2003). Introduction to Coastal and Geomorphology. New Hampshire: Arnold

AG31106 ACADEMIC EXERCISE

Student required to write a shaped project paper academic exercise according to Universiti Malaysia Sabah’s format not

exceeding 40,000 words or 120 page (text only) based on own research subject. This basic research training may include field

study or library research or combination of both.

References

Abdul Samad, H. (1995). Panduan Kajilidikan Geografi. Bangi: Penerbit UKM

Ahmad Mahdzan Ayub (2002). Kaedah Penyelidikan Sosioekonomi. 2nd ed. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka Strahler,

A. & Strahler, A.H. (1989). Investigating Physical Geography: An Exercise Manual. London: John Wiley & Sons Strahler, A.H.

(2004). Laboratory Manual for Physical Geography. London: John Wiley & Sons

Thomas, R.M. & Brubaker, D.L. (2002). Theses and Dissertations: A Guide to Planning, Research and Writing.

Page 73: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

73

Wesport: Berging & Garvey

AG30103 FIELD WORK AND DATA ANALYSIS

This course contrasts with other courses because it is a fully ourdoor operational lecture. Student will be unveiled on in field by

hands on with regard to theories studied in lecture room. Field research technique behave physical such as data and

monitoring collection water quality, air, waste, landform etc. by using scientific equipment and using interview and so on

technique for the study which are faced with society. Finally, students will learn to manipulate and analyse data to

information.

References

Abdul Samad, H. (1995). Panduan Kajilidikan Geografi. Bangi: Penerbit UKM

Ahmad Mahdzan Ayub (2002). Kaedah Penyelidikan Sosioekonomi. 2nd ed. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka Strahler,

A. & Strahler, A.H. (1989). Investigating Physical Geography: An Exercise Manual. London: John Wiley & Sons Strahler, A.H.

(2004). Laboratory Manual for Physical Geography. London: John Wiley & Sons

Thomas, R.M. & Brubaker, D.L. (2002). Theses and Dissertations; A Guide to Planning, Research and Writing.

Wesport: Berging & Garvey

AG20703 INTRODUCTION CLIMATOLOGY

This course equips students with the basic concepts of climatology. They will be introduced to the climatic and meteorological

phenomena, which are constantly changing subject to the interaction between the solar and atmospheric systems. This

interaction produces various climatic patterns at the global, regional and local scales, which can significantly influence human

beings and determine the distribution of flora and fauna. The climatic elements to be investigated, among others, are:

precipitation, temperature, humidity, air pressure and wind. Climate classification is another aspect to be explored in this

course. The teaching and learning experience will also include fieldwork – a practical observation in the real environment,

in order to strengthen the students’ understanding of the theoretical part.

References

Aguado, E. & Burt, J. (2000). Understanding Weather and Climate. 2nd ed. Prentice Hall Ahrens, C.D. (2001). Essentials of

Meteorology. 3rd ed. Brooks/Cole.

Barry, R.G. and Chorley, R.J. (1998). Atmosphere, Weather and Climate. 7th ed. New York: Prentice Hall Chan, N.W. (2000)

Asas Kaji Iklim. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka

Sellers, A.H. & Robinson, P.J. (1988). Contemporary Climatology. E.L.B.S

AG30903 TOWN AND COUNTRY PLANNING

This course is design to introduce the students to the planning framework and system especially in Malaysia. The lectures will

expose the students to the planning concepts, theory, procedures and methods, and problems in urban planning, development,

policies and practices. This course provides opportunity for students to learn the way planning decisions impact on real life

situation.

References

Badaruddin M. & Rahmat Azam M. et.al (2001), Prinsip-Prinsip Perancangan, Prentice Hall: Kuala Lumpur

Page 74: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

74

Ibrahim Wahab (1991), Perancangan Bandar: Aspek Fizikal dan Kawalan Pembangunan. Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Margaret, R. (1974). An Introduction to Town Planning Techniques. Hutchinson & Co. (Publishers) Ltd. Petempatan Felda;

Perspektif Perancangan Bandar dan Desa, Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka. Ratcliffe, John. (1993). An Introduction To Town And

Country Planning. Taylor & Francis Ltd. William, M. (1984). Applied Social Science for Environmental Planning. Westview Press.

AG21203 ENVIRONMENTAL ECOSYSTEM MANAGEMENT

This course is design to introduce the students with basic ecological and ecosystem concepts. This includes the basic

concept in environmental research with focusing the interaction between ecosystems. Furthermore, the course also focuses on

mechanism in developing best practice in ecosystem management. Lastly, at the end of the course the student will be able to

understand the importance of integrated ecosystem management.

References

Odum, E.P., (1996). Asas Ekologi Bahagian Satu: Konsep dan Prinsip Ekologi Asas (Terjemahan). Kuala Lumpur:

Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Postel, S., & Richter, R.D, (2003). Rivers for Live: Managing Water for People and Nature. New York: Island Press Weeks, W.W.,

(1997). Beyond the Ark: Tools for an Ecosystem Approach to Conservation. New York: Island Press. Yaffee, S.L., (1997).

Ecosystem Management in the United State: An Assessment of Current Experience. New

York: Island Press.

AG30203 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

The course is offered with the aim to familiarise students with the basic principles in making environmental impact

assessment. It emphasizes that the understanding of the main elements of various environmental ecosystems is the key to an

effective evaluation of the development impacts. Students are also introduced to the procedures of conducting the actual

environmental impact assessment as been legally practised in Malaysia. Fieldwork trip is naturally an important part of the

evaluation for this course.

References

Odum, E.P. (1996). Asas Ekologi Bahagian Satu: Konsep dan Prinsip Ekologi Asas (Terjemahan). Kuala Lumpur: Dewan

Bahasa dan Pustaka

Borrow, C.J. (1999). Environmental Management: Principle and Practice. London: Routledge

Glasson, J., Therivel, R. & Chadwick, A. (1998). Introduction to Environmental Impact Assessment. London: Routledge

Morris, P. & Therivel, R. (2001). Methods of Environmental Impact Assessment. London: Routledge O’Riordan, T. (1999).

Environmental Science for Environmental Management. London: Longman

AG30403 URBAN SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT

This course is design to introduce the concept of sustainable waste management to the student. Emphasis will be given to the

integrated waste management concept to achieve the objective of best waste management practise. The discussion will also be

focusing in assessing the concept of Reduce, Reuse and Recycle (3R) and the choice of latest technology in managing

waste. Beside, the use of life cycle assessment will be discuss in order to understand the environmental impact derive from a

waste management system.

References

Page 75: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

75

Cheong, Hoe-seog (1995). Pricing for Municipal Solid Waste Disposal in Korea. Norwich: CSERGE

Hird, A.B. (2002). Tyre West and Resource Management: A Mass Balance Approach. Crowthorne: TRL. Ltd

Hunt, L. (1997) The Little Green Book: A Waste Management and Recycling Reference Book. Ruislip: LGB Enviromental

Keita, M. (2001). Building partnerships for Urban Waste Management in Bamako. London: IIED Drylands Programme Quimby,

T.H.E. (1975). Recycling the Alternative to Disposal: A Case Study of the Potential for Increased Recycling of Newspapers and

Corrugated Containers in the Washington Metropolitan Area. Baltimore: John Hopkins University Press

AG30603 URBANIZATION AND MUNICIPALITY

This subject will focus on how the urban exist and the process that makes the urban as it is. Human activities and population

distribution are the main factor to the urban changes. Some main issues that exist in an urban area such as poverty, urban

sprawl, migration, smart city and urban settlement will be discussed. The concept of smart planning like emphasizing the

doctrine of interaction between human and environment, human and human, and human and The Creator will become a

basic approach to make the urban more livable. In the modern world, city equipped by advanced technology and networking

systems. This can make the urban area is more complex to be manage.

References

Hartshorn, T.A. (1991). Interpreting the City: An Urban Geography. 2nd ed. New York: John Wiley

& Sons Knox, P. & Pinch, S. (2000). Urban Social Geography. New Jersey: Prentice Hall

Maantay, J. (2004). GIS for the Urban Environment. Redlands: ESRI Press

Wilson, A. (2000). Complex Spatial Systems:The Modelling Foundations of Urban and Regional Analysis. 4th ed. New Jersey:

Prentice Hall

Potter, R., et al. (2003). Geographies of Development. 2nd ed. New Jersey: Prentice Hall

AG30803 GLOBALIZATION AND DEVELOPMENT

This course introduces the issues of globalization and development from the perspective of spatial implications. Although the

community says that globalization makes the world without borders, but the fact that development in globalization itself is more

emphasis to the geographical perspective and development is actively moving without physical restrictions. Among the subjects

to be examined is the existence of trading block and the effects of globalization on the economic and social elements.

References

Benería, L., Berik, G., & Floro, M. (2015). Gender, development and globalization: economics as if all people mattered.

Routledge

Herod, A. (2009). Geographies of globalization: a critical introduction. John Wiley & Sons.

Hite, A. B., & Chorev, N. (2014). The globalization and development reader: Perspectives on development and global

change. John Wiley & Sons.

Murray, W. E., & Overton, J. (2014). Geographies of globalization. Routledge. Rowntree,L., (2002). Diversity Amid Globalization.

2nd

ed. New York : Prentice Hall .

Rowntree,L., (2002). Globalization and Diversity : Geography of a Changing World. New York : Prentice Hall .

Samuel P. (1996). The Clash of Civilization and the Remarking of World Order. New York : Usborne Books.

Page 76: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

76

AG30703 MANAGEMENT AND LAND ADMINISTRATION

This course give emphasis to management concept and land administration in Malaysia. This management and land

administration include valuation and laws. This course also give understanding to purpose law, policy

and law uniformity land titles, land registration, ownership rights transfer etc which stresses more effective and practical

management.

References

Abdul Aziz Hussin. (1996). Undang-undang Perolehan Dan Pengambilan Tanah. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan

Pustaka Armstrong, H. & Tayl, J. Regional Economic and Policy. London: Blackwell Publisher

Hall, P. (2002). Urban and Regional Planning. 4th ed. London: Routledge

Kivell, P., Roberts, P. & Walker, G.P. (1998). Environment, Planning & Land Use: Urban and Regional

Planning and Development. Aldershot: Ashgate Publishing

McCann, P. (2001). Urban and Regional Economics. London: Oxford University Press

AG10103 HUMAN GEOGRAPHY

This course is a general introduction to the study of human geography. In this course special attention will be given to the

human process, and how the pattern of human behavior created. Discussion in this course will be covered many aspects of

human environment such as population, cultural, economy, settlement, urbanization and environment.

References

Huggett, R., et al. (2004). Physical Geography: a Human Perspective. London: Arnold Publishers

Murphy, A.B., & de Blij, H.J., (2002). Human Geography: Culture, Society, and Space. New York: John Wiley & Sons Pacione,

M., (1999). Applied Geography: Principles and Practice: An Introduction to Useful Research in Physical,

Environmental and Human Geography. London: Routledge

Rubenstein, J.M., (2001). The Cultural Landscape: An Introduction to Human Geography. 7th ed. New Jersey: Prentice Hall

Strahler, A.H., (2001). Physical Geography: Science and Systems of the Human Environment. 2nd ed. New York: John Wiley &

Sons

AG10503 INTRODUCTION TO GEOGRAPHY

This course is an introduction and exposure on geographical discipline of his formation history up to fall into physical

geography and human geography. The component of the course covered geographical knowledge development history,

concept, theory and idealism, study and issues theme related to geography field in general.

References

Chan Ngai Weng, et. al. 1993. Pengantar Geografi. Kuala Lumpur: DBP

De Bliji, H. J. 1996. Human Geography: Culture, Society and Space. New York: John Wiley. Katiman

Rostam. 1990. Konsep asas geografi manusia. Bangi: Penerbit UKM

Rubenstein, J. M. 2003. An Introduction to Human Geography: The Culture Landscape. USA: Prentice Hall. Strahler, A.

H. & Strahler, A. (2002). Introduction Physical Geography. 2nd ed. New York: John Wiley & Sons

Page 77: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

77

AG31503 SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT (SIA)

This course will begin by focusing on the historical, epistemological, and ideological aspects of SIA as currently practiced and as

idealized by various practitioners. Students will be introduced to the early stages of conducting an SIA. Important steps in the

beginning of any SIA involve determining: 1) the manner in which the public and various interested parties will be involved in the

process; 2) the exact nature of the project, event or policy and any alternative scenarios regarding its future development; 3) the

baseline conditions existing in a community prior to the advent of the projected change; 4) the anticipated impacts on

social and physical; and 5) monitoring and evaluation. The course will continue by focusing on geographical research

techniques that can be used to examine the anticipated impacts and to discover previously unanticipated impacts or affected

groups. Finally, the course will reflect on the implications of SIA research, theory and practice. As such, students should

come away equipped with the ability to understand, interpret and design a full pladge implementation of SIA project.

References

Becker, H. A. (2001) “Social impact assessment”, European Journal of Operational Research, 128 (2), 311-321. Broad, K.

(2005) The international handbook of social impact assessment: conceptual and methodological

advances, H. A. Becker, F. Vanclay, F. (Eds). Edward Elgar Publishing, Cheltenham, UK

Burdge, R. J. (1994) A conceptual approach to social impact assessment: collection of writings by Rabel J Burdge and

colleagues, Social Ecology Press, Middleton, Wisconsin.

Burdge, R. J. and Vanclay, F. (1995) Environmental and Social Impact Assessment, John Wiley and Sons, United Kingdom.

Cosslett, C., Buchan, D. and Smith, J. (2004) Assessing the social effects of conservation on neighbouring

communities:

Guidelines for Department of Conservation staff, DOC Science Publishing, Wellington, New Zealand.

Heikkinen, T. and Sairinen, R. (2007) Social Impact Assessment in Regional Land Use Planning - Best practices from

Finland, Nordregio, Stockholm.

Howitt, R. (2001) Rethinking Resource Management: Justice, Sustainability and Indigenous People, Routledge, Taylor &

Francis Group, London, New York.

Kerajaan Malaysia. (ND) “Pengenalan Ringkas SIA: Penilaian Impak Sosial (Brief Introduction to SIA: Social

Impact Assessment)“, Kementerian Pembangunan Wanita dan Masyarakat, Malaysia, Kuala Lumpur

Tang, B.-S., Wong, S.-W. and Lau, M. C.-H. (2008) “Social impact assessment and public participation in

AG21503 TRANSPORTATION GEOGRAPHY

Transportation Geography is the study of the transport in the context of spatial. This course will introduce students to a range of

transport geographical concepts which are related to human (user) within spatial perspectives. The course will cover the role of

transportation in the urban and rural transportation contexts and also introduce students to a traffic planning concepts,

procedures and outline some contemporary issues relating to transport geography.

References

Bruton, M. (1985). Introduction to Transportation Planning. London: Hutchinson. Daniels, P.W. and Warnes, A.M. (1980).

Movements in Cities. London: Methuen.

Eliot Hurst, M.E. (1974). Transpotation Geography. New York: McGraw-Hill Inc., 1974. Headicar, P. 2009. Transport policy and

planning in Great Britain: Routledge.

Hoyles, B.S and R. Knowles (eds.) (1998). Modern Transport Geography, (2nd

Edition) London: Belhaven.

Jones, P.M., Dix, M.C., Clarke, M.I. and Heggie, I.G. (1983). Understanding Travel Behaviour. England: Gowe, Aldershot.

Leinbach, T.R. and Chia Lin Sien. (1989). South-east Asian Transport: Issues in Development. Singapore: Oxford

University Press, 1989.

Page 78: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

78

Rodrigue, J. P., Comtois, C., & Slack, B. (2013). The geography of transport systems. Routledge.

Page 79: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

79

HISTORY PROGRAMME (HA24)

AJ20403 CRITICAL METHODS IN HISTORICAL RESEARCH AND WRITING

This course builds on the basic research skills learnt in AJ10103, Pengantar Ilmu Sejarah, providing training in the skills

required for advanced study in the field of History. Topics will include library and archival research, oral history, historical writing,

historiography and interpretation. Students will eventually use the knowledge here to complete a supervised research project

during the final year.

References

Barzun, J. & Graff, F.G. 1970.The Modern Researcher: The Classic Manual of all Aspects of Research and Writing.

New York: Harcourt, Brace & World.

Leedy, Paul D. 1980. Pratical Research: Planning And Design. Second Edition. New York: Macmillan Publishing Co., Inc.

Muhd.Yusof Ibrahim. 1986. Pengertian Sejarah: Beberapa Perbahasan Mengenai Teori Dan Kaedah. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan

Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Neuman, W. Lawrence. 1997. Social Research Methods: Qualitative and Quantitative Approaches. Singapore: Allyn and

Bacon.

Tosh, J. 1984. The Pursuit of History: Aim, Methods and New Direction In The Study Of Modern History. London: Longman.

AJ20603 SOUTHEAST ASIAN HISTORY: COLONIALISM AND IMPERIALISM

This course is the second part of a three-semester survey of Southeast Asian history from early times to the present. The

course dwells on the historical development of the region during the period of Western imperialism and the

Japanese interregnum. The time period is roughly from the mid 19th century AD to about

1945, but this is extended to a brief discussion on the impact of Japanese occupation on the colonies, particularly the

rise of nationalism. However, it is necessary to explain something of the foregoing basis of that history. It stresses features

that are common and those which are not. Emphasis shall be given to the motivational factors of the imperialist powers, the

establishment of colonial regimes, structural changes implemented on the political, economic and social dimensions, and the

effects of imperialism on the colonies.

References

Bastin, John & Harry J. Benda. 1977. A History of Modern Southeast Asia:Colonialism, Nationalism and

Decolonization.

Sydney, Australia: Prentice Hall of Australia Pty. Ltd.

Cady, John F. 1964. Southeast Asia, Its Historical Development. New York: McGraw-Hill.

Owen, N. G. et.al. (2004). The Emergence of Modern Southeast Asia: A NewHistory. Hawaii: University of Hawaii

Press. SarDesai, D.R. 1994. Southeast Asia: Past and Present. Boulder, San Francisco: Westview Press.

Tarling, Nicholas. 2001. Imperialism in Southeast Asia: A Fleeting Phase. London & New York: Routledge And also other

books, journal or articles related to this course.

AJ21003 OTTOMAN EMPIRE AND THE MODERN MIDDLE EAST UNTIL WORLD WAR II

This course discusses the affairs of the Ottoman Empire and Modern Middle East based on historical approach. This course

is an introduction to the history of Middle East. Important issues discussed in this course include historical geography of the

Middle East (religious and ethnic diversity, the series of Crusades and others), and the history of the Ottoman Empire (its

Page 80: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

80

achievements and the fall of the empire).This course shall also ascertain the history of the region during the World War I,

including Western policies, the establishment of National Home of Jews, Arab Nationalism, the Mandate system and the role

played by the Western powers before World War II.

References

Anderson, W. Ewan. 2000. The Middle East: Geography and The Geo Politics. New York: Routledge

Aroian, A. Lois & Mitchell, P. Richard. 1984. The Modern Middle East and North Africa. New York: Macmillan

Publishing Company. (Terj. Mohammad Redzuan Othman. 1991. DBP: Kuala Lumpur).

Berkes, Niyazi. 1964. The Development of Secularism in Turkey. Montreal: McGill University Press. Cleveland, L. William. 1994.

A History of The Modern Middle East. Boulder: Westview Press.

Fadhlullah Jamil. 2000. Islam di Asia Barat Moden, Sejarah Penjajahan & Pergolakan. Selangor: Thinkers’s Library Sdn. Bhd.

Lenczowski, George. 1971. The Middle East In World Affairs. London: Cornell University Press. Mahayuddin Hj. Yahya & Ahmad

Jelani Halimi. 1997. Sejarah Islam. Kuala Lumpur: Fajar Bakti Sdn.Bhd.

Shaw, J. Stanford. 1976. History of The Ottoman Empire and Modern Turkey. Vol. 1. London: Cambridge University Press.

AJ21003 EUROPE BEFORE WORLD WAR II

This course traces the roots of modern European history, focussing on themes such as the Industrial Revolution in Britain, new

imperialism, the French Revolution and the 1848 revolution, Russian Revolution 1907, World War I, the Great Depression and

the demise of League of Nations, Stalinism, Franco and the Spanish Civil War, Mussolini and fascism, and Hitler and World

War II.

References

Dunbabin, J. The Cold War: The Great Powers and Their Allies. London: Longman. 1994. James, H. The German

Identity: 1770 to the Present Day. London: Phoenix. 1994

Gunther, R. & Jose R. Montero. The Politics of Spain. Cambridge: Cambridge Univeristy Press. Kennedy, P. The Rise and Fall of

the Great Powers. London: Fontana Press. 1988.

McCormick, J. Understanding the European Union: A Concise Introduction. 3rd Ed. London: Palgrave Macmillan.

2005. And also other books, journal or articles related to this course.

AJ21903 SOUTHEAST ASIAN HISTORY: PRE-COLONIALISM

This is an introductory course to the history of Southeast Asia before colonialism. It focuses on the historical development of the

region from the proto-classical period (from 3rd century B.C) to post classical (18 th century A.D). Located between the

Chinese and Indic civilizations, Southeast Asia has been a region of striking diversity where for more than two thousand years the

complex indigenous cultures encountered with and were enriched by world’s major influences-from major religions like Hinduism,

Buddhism, Islam, and Confucianism to Western influences. Yet what makes the region distinctive is also the subtle commonality

of local polities, societies and cultures. The complex traditions which have shaped the history of the region are very much alive

today despite colonisation and Westernisation over the past hundred years. This course explores both the important phases of

changes and major issues before colonialism. Among the issues covered in this course are the early settlements, state formation

and development from a simple polity to an empire, and influences from the Indic, Chinese, and Western civilizations.

References

Abdul Rahman Hj. Abdullah. 2000. Sejarah dan Tamadun Asia Tenggara: Sebelum dan Sesudah Pengaruh

Islam. Kuala Lumpur: Utusan Publications & Distributions Sdn. Bhd.

Page 81: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

81

Coedes, George. 1968. The Indianized States of Southeast Asia, (edited by Walter F. Vella; translated by Sue Brown

Cowing). University of Hawaii Press.

Reid, Anthony & David Marr. (ed). 1979. Perception of the Past in Southeast Asia. Kuala Lumpur: Heinemann Educational

Books (Asia) Ltd.

Reid, Anthony. Southeast Asia in the Age of Commerce 1450-1680: Expansion and Crisis. Yale University Press. 1995.

Wolters, O.W. 1982. History, Culture and Religion in Southeast Asian Perspective. Singapore. And also other books,

journal or articles related to this course

AJ30303 HISTORY OF SOUTH EAST ASIA: ISLAMIC REVIVALISM

This course emphasizes on the history of Islamic revivalism in South East Asia ranging from 19th century until 20th century. At

the beginning, this course explains the concept and notion of Islamic revivalism, the definition of Islah (reform) dan Tajdid

(renewal), the causes of Islamic revivalism in Muslim society especially in South East Asia. Those causes include the internal and

external factors which are related to the Muslims’ aspects of life such as bidaah, khurafat, the influence of Middle East Islamic

movements, colonialism, imperialism and others. The discussions will also touch on the Islamic movements that are present in

several countries of South East Asia. The main aspect

lies on the origin or history of the establishment of the particular movements, the founder that were involved in the movements,

the ideas and approaches that were carried out by the movements, the reactions to the movements and others. Amongst

Islamic or Muslim movements discussed in this course are Kaum Muda in Tanah Melayu (Malaysia), Resistance Movement

in South Thailand such as PULO, MORO movement in South Philippines, Rohingya movement in Myanmar and

Muhammadiyyah and Nahdatul Ulama in Indonesia.

References

Abdul Aziz Mat Ton. 2001. Politik al-Imam. Kuala Lumpur: DBP.

Abdul Rahman Haji Abdullah. 1987. Pemikiran Islam Masa Kini: Sejarah dan Aliran. Kuala Lumpur: DBP.

C.A. Majul. 1973. Muslim In The Philippines. Quezon City. University of the Philippines Press. (Terj. Islam di Filifina: DBP). Deliar

Noer. 1988. Gerakan Moden Islam di Indonesia 1900-1942. Jakarta: Lembaga Penelitian, Pendidikan dan Penerangan Ekonomi

dan Sosial.

Esposito, John. (ed.) 1987. Islam In Asia: Religion, Politics and Society. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Lukman Taib.

1996, Political Dimensions of Islam in Southeast Asia, Bangi: UKM.

Lukman Taib. 1997. The Politics and Governments of South East Asia. Kuala Lumpur: Golden Books Centre Sdn Bhd. Nik

Anuar Nik Mahmud. 1999. Sejarah Perjuangan Melayu Patani, 1785-1954. Bangi: UKM.

AJ30503 SOUTHEAST ASIAN HISTORY: MODERNISATION AND DEVELOPMENT

This course is the third part of a three-semester survey of Southeast Asian history from early times to the present. This third part

will cover the period from the end of World War II to the present. It will study the major historical developments in the following

countries: Burma (Myanmar), Cambodia, Indonesia, Laos, the Philippines, Thailand, and Vietnam. The course will be divided in

three parts. The first part will trace decolonization measures, nationalist uprisings and independence movements. The second

part will look into attempts at self-government, ethnic and regional tensions, leadership problems and religious fundamentalism.

The final part will focus on big power rivalry and efforts at regionalism.

References

Cady, John F. 1974.The History of Postwar Southeast Asia. Athens: Ohio University Press.

Christie, Clive J. 1996. A Modern History of Southeast Asia: Decolonisation, Nationalism and Separatism. London and New

York: Tauris Academic Studies.

Page 82: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

82

Pluvier, J.M. 1974. South-East Asia: From Colonialism to Independence. Kuala Lumpur: Oxford University Press. SarDesai, D.R.

1994. Southeast Asia: Past and Present. Boulder, San Francisco: Westview Press.

Steinberg, David Joel. (ed). 1987. In Search of Southeast Asia: A Modern History. Australia: Allen &Unwin Australia Pty. Ltd.

Tarling, Nicholas. (ed). 1999. The Cambridge History of Southeast Asia. United Kingdom: Cambridge University Press.

AJ30703 HISTORY OF MIDDLE EAST CONFLICTS POST WORLD WAR II

This course focuses o n issues which are related to the conflicts and unrests in the Middle East, ranging from World War

II until t h e 1990s. Discussions will touch on the establishment or creation of an independent Israel State in 1948 and

its expansion and developments, the Arab-Israel conflict, Civil War in Lebanon, The Iran- Iraq War, Islamic resurgence and the

rise of Arab Nationalism that mounted to a series of revolutions such as the Egypt Revolution in 1952 and Iran Revolution in

1979. The role played by the Western Powers in this region pertaining to these conflicts will also be discussed. Additionally,

this course will also discuss on issues that had coloured the history of the Middle East conflict. These include Intifada of

the Palestinian and o th e r m inority Issues. Generally, this course attempts to give a comprehensive understanding of historical

aspects that have shaped the affairs of the region.

References

Aroian, A. Lois & Mitchell, P. Richard. 1984. The Modern Middle East and North Africa. New York: Macmillan

Publishing Company. (Terj. Mohammad Redzuan Othman. 1991. DBP: Kuala Lumpur). Cleveland, L. William. 1994. A History of

The Modern Middle East. Boulder: Westview Press.

Fadhlullah Jamil. 2000. Islam di Asia Barat Moden, Sejarah Penjajahan & Pergolakan. Selangor: Thinkers’s Library

Sdn. Bhd. Lenczowski, George. 1971. The Middle East In World Affairs. London: Cornell University Press. Ovendale, Ritchie.

1999. The Origin of The Arab-Israeli Wars. (3rd Edition). London: Longman

Pappe, Ilan. 1999. The Israel / Palestine Question. London: Routledge.

Smith, D. Charles. 2001. Palestine and The Arab-Israeli Conflict. Hampshire: Macmillan Press LTD. Yapp, M.E.

1996. The Making of The Modern Near East, A History to 1995. London: Longman.

AJ31203 TAJDID AND ISLAH MOVEMENTS IN THE MUSLIM WORLD

This course explores into the discussion of Tajdid (Renewal) and Islah (Reform) movements in the Muslim World. Important

aspects to be discussed are the root of history of the establishment of the movement, the factors that led to the movements (the

situation of the Muslim society-external and internal factors), and the founders of those movements, ideas and

approaches. Among the movements that will be covered include Wahabbi movement, Islamic Movement in Egypt,

Sanusiyyah movement in Africa, An-Nur movement in Turkey, Jamaat Islamiyah in Pakistan, Shah Waliullah in India as well as

movements in South East Asia.

References

Choueiri, Y. M. 1990. Islamic Fundamentalism. London: Pinter Publishers.

Esposito, J. L. 1983. Islam and Muslim Politics. Dlm. Esposito, J. L. (pytn.). Voices of Resurgent of Islam, hlm. 3-15.

Oxford University Press: Oxford.

Esposito, J. L. 1995. The Islamic Threat: Myth or Reality? Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Rahman, Fazlur. 1979. Islam: Challenges and Opportunities. Dlm. Welch, A.T. & Cachia, P. (pytn.). Islam: Past

Influence and Peresent Challenges, hlm. 315-330. United Kingdom: Edinburgh University Press.

Rahman, Fazlur. 1987. Metode dan Alternatif Neomodenisme Islam. Pytn. Taufik Adnan Amal. Bandung: Pustaka Mizan. Harun

Nasution. 1982. Pembaharuan Dalam Islam, Sejarah Pemikiran dan Gerakan. Jakarta: Penerbit Bulan Bintang. Keddie, N. R.

1968. An Islamic Response to Imperialism. Los Angeles: University California Press.

Page 83: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

83

al-Maududi, Abu al- Ala. 1999. A Short History of The Revivalist Movement in Islam. Terj. Al-Ashari. Petaling Jaya: The Other

Press.

Mohammad Zaidi bin Mat. 2001. Bediuzzaman Said Nursi: Sejarah Perjuangan dan Pemikiran. Selangor: Malita Jaya

Publisher.

Voll, J. O. 1983. Renewal and Reform in Islamic History: Tajdid and Islah. Dlm. Esposito, J. L. (pnyt.). Voices of Resurgent

Islam, hlm. 32-47. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

AJ31603 EUROPE AFTER WORLD WAR II

The purpose of this course is to introduce students to the historical development of Europe after the 2nd World War. It starts with

the defeat of Germany, and the Russian, British, and American troops face each other in the rubble of a destroyed

continent in the beginning of what soon became known as the Cold War. It follows the absorption of the aftershocks of the

Holocaust, the reconstruction and reorganization of Europe, the Americanization of the Western, and the Sovietization of

the Eastern half of the continent. It will take an in-depth look at the first moves toward a European federation which, on a long

and often bumpy road led to the creation of a European Union, which compasses now most European states. It will give

equal weight to Eastern as well as to Western Europe and will examine the collapse of the Soviet Union and the

democratization of Eastern Europe.

References

Discala, Spencer M. 2004. Twentieth Century Europe: Politics, Society, Culture. Boston: McGraw-Hill. Isaacs, Jeremy &

Downing, Taylor. 2009. Cold War. London: Abacus.

McCormick, John. 2005. Understanding The European Union A Concise Introduction.New York: Palgrave Macmillan.

Mcadams, A. James. 1993. Germany Divided: From the Wall to Reunification. Princeton: Princeton University Press. Pryce-

Jones, David. 1995. The Strange Death of the Soviet Empire. New York.

And also other books, journal or articles related to this course.

Page 84: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

84

CREATIVE ARTS PROGRAMMES (HA11)

CA22403 PRODUCTION PROCEDURES II

The Production Procedure 2 educates students on the aspect of video and film production management which covers pre-

production aspect, production and post-production. Practically, students will be exposed to processes and procedures of film-

making such as script development and pre-visualization, budget preparation, actor selection and production force. In filming of a

film, students will be exposed to the ‘take’ technique, shot composition, sound recording and lighting. At the post-production level,

students will also be exposed to editing and visual effects.

References

Cleve, Bastian. 2005. Film Production Management, 3rd ed. Focal Press.

Gates, Richard. 2001. Production Management for Film and Video, 3rd Ed. Focal Press.

Irving, David K & Rea, Peter W. 2006. Producing and Directing the Short Film and Video, 3rd ed. Focal Press. Lyver, Des &

Swainson, Graham. 2002. Basics of Video Production, 2nd ed. Focal Press.

Whitaker, Jerry. 2002. Master Handbook of Video Production. McGraw-Hill Professional.

CA24403 TEATER, FILM AND BUSINESS

This course exposes students to the film and theater business structure which includes production, distribution and screening.

Each of these aspects will be discussed in detail in this course. The importance of studio systems and free-filmmakers will be

explained upon the discussion on production aspects. The form of distribution covers the selection of distributors, and the payment

of distribution fees will be discussed. As for the showing aspect, the government policy such as compulsory shows and cinema

issues will be discussed.

References

Bosko, Mark Steven. 2005. The Complete Independent Movie Marketing Handbook. Michael Wiese Productions.

Durie, John, Pham Annika & Watson Neil. 2000. Marketing & Selling Your Film Around the World: A Guide for Independent

Filmmakers. Silman-James Press.

Goodell, Gregory. 1998. Independent Feature Film Production: A Complete Guide from Concept Through Distribution. St. Martin’s

Press.

Litwak, Mark. 2004. Risky Business: Financing & Distributing Independent Films. Silman-James Press. Squire, Jason E. 2004.

Movie Business Book 3rd ed. Simon & Shchsuter.

CA31703 THEATER AND FILM PUBLICATION TECHNOLOGY

This course is a continuation of the CA22403 Production Procedure 2 (PP2) course. As PP2 exposes students to the film and

theater production process comprehensively, this course focuses on the production process which consists of the uses and

changes of technology such as pre-visualization process, cinematography (camera), video / film and audio editing process, visual

effects, film processing and technology shows (satellite and 3D). Students will also be exposed to new media such as web based

technologies as a platform to publish publications. Through the individual producing digital films practical, this course is expected

to strengthen students' skills in the field of video or filmmaking.

References

Goodman Robert M. & McGrath, Patrick. 2002. Editing Digital Video : The Complete Creative and Technical Guide.

McGraw-Hil

Page 85: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

85

Rizzo, Michael. 2005. Art Direction Handbook for Film. Focal Press.

Proferes, Nicholas. 2004. Film Directing Fundamentals: See Your Film Before Shooting, 2nd Ed. Focal Press. Wells, Peter. 2006.

Digital Camcorder Technique (Illustrated). Crowood Press, Limited.

Whitaker, Jerry. 2002. Master Handbook of Video Production. McGraw-Hill Professional.

CA30402 GRAPHIC COMMUNICATION

This course focuses on the awareness of the importance of graphics in the marketing of a product. Through the use of the latest

technology, students will learn how to market their artistic skills and their end products.

References

Ashford, G. 1990. Everyday Publicity: A Practical Guide. Law -Arts.

Newman, D. 1994. Subscribe Now! Building Arts Audience Through Dynamic Subscription Promotion. New York: Drama Book.

Reiss, A. H. (ed.) 1993. Market the Arts! New York: FEDAPT.

Tooley, M. 1997. Computer Engineer’s Book. Butterworth-Heineman

Wolf, T. 1990. Presenting Performers. Cambridge, MA: New England Foundation for the Arts.

CA33102 MEDIA PUBLICATION MANAGEMENT

This course will expose students to the basic publishing techniques covering pre- and post-publications such as production of print

and electronic media such as video and film production. The production processes of print media such as books and newspaper

production covers editing process, spellchecking, printing and up to the print media retailed will be discussed. Whereas in video

and film production, students will be exposed to linear and non-linear techniques in producing a short film production or

commercial film.

References

Helmut Kipphan (Editor). 2001. Handbook of Print Media. Springer.

Giuseppe Cristiano. 2012. The Storyboard Artist: A Guide to Freelancing in Film, TV, and Advertising. Michael Wiese Productions

Thomas A. William. 2002. Publish Your Own Magazine, Guide Book, or Weekly Newspaper: How to Start, Manage, and Profit from

a Homebased Publishing Company. Sentient Publications

Mamer, Bruce. (2000) Film Production Technique: Creating The Accomplished Image. USA: Wadsworth/Thomson Learning.

Sandra Moriarty. 2011. Advertising & IMC: Principles and Practice, 9th Edition. Prentice Hall

CA30802 WORK AND COPYRIGHT

This course introduces students to the law of copyright and law in applied field. In addition, this course will also focus on to the

legal principles of print and electronic media publishing, the rights of prohibition of publication. Discussion of this course will also

use some current issues such as piracy and plagiarism as well as its impact on existing laws.

References

Frough, William. 1991. Screen Writing Tricks of the Trade. London: Silman James. Gleen, Ethel C.

1997. Strategic Newspaper Management. New York: Allyn Bacon.9

Related Act:

1. Akta A1420 Akta Hak Cipta (Pindaan) 2012

2. Akta A1485 Akta Hasutan (Pindaan) 2015

Page 86: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

86

3. Akta A1436 Akta Mesin Cetak dan Penerbitan (Pindaan) 2012

4. Akta 815 Akta Cap Dagangan 2019.

5. Akta 606 Akta Cakera Optik 2000

6. Akta 617 Perbadanan Harta Intelek 2002

CA32703 NOVEL WRITING

As an introduction to novel writing, students will be taught regarding definition, history, and development of novel in Malaysia.

Aesthetic concepts and various novel writing techniques will be exposed to students. In addition to that, various literary theories in

relation to novel writing will be taught to the students.

References

DiYanni, Robert. 2001. Fiction: An Introduction. Singapore: McGraw Hill.

Jefferson, Ann dan Robey, David (ed.). 1988. Teori Kesusasteraan Moden: Pengenalan Secara Perbandingan (Terj. Mokhtar

Ahmad). Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Rahman Shaari. 1993. Memahami Gaya Bahasa. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa & Pustaka.

Scholes, Robert and Kellogg, Robert. 1966. The Nature of Narrative. London, Oxford, New York: Oxford University Press. Wellek,

Rene dan Warren, Austin. 1988. Teori Kesusasteraan (Terj. Wong Seng Tong). Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa & Pustaka.

CA32202 ACADEMIC WRITING

This course teaches students on matters regarding writing proposal and thesis. Among the focus are format and forms of

academic writing, including the whole thesis writing process – from the stage of writing the draft to the stage of completing the

thesis.

References

Bernard, H.R. and Ryan, G.W. 2007. Analyzing Qualitative Data: Systematic Approaches. London: Sage. Chris, H. 1998. Doing a

Literature Review. London: Sage.

E.R. Kjell. 1992. Surviving your Dissertation: A Comprehensive Guide. London: Sage. Harrop, J. 1991.

Writing and Editing. New York: Allyn & Bacon.

Ingalls, A & Moody, D. 1997. Within Reach: A Guide to Successful Writing. New York: Allyn & Bacon. Salkind, N.J. 2009. Exploring

Research. New Jersey: Pearson Education Inc.

CA20302 PENULISAN MEDIA

Kursus ini menumpukan kepada kepentingan imej visual dan suara dalam penulisan media; juga membincangkan ciri-ciri penulisan

yang baik untuk media penyiaran media (tv dan radio). Pelajar diperkenalkan teori-teori berkaitan dengan media massa dan

masyarakat sebelum didedahkan secara langsung dengan penulisan media.Di samping itu mereka diberi peluang menilai

dan membuat perbandingan format penulisan media antarabangsa.

Rujukan

Epstein, E.J.1975. Between Fact and Fiction: The Problem of Journalism. New York: Vintage Books. Gerald, Millerson. (1995).

(12th.Ed): The Technique of Television Production. London: Hartnolls Ltd. Hulteng, J.L. 1979. The News media: What Makes

Them Tick? Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Mamer, Bruce. (2000). (2nd.ed) Film Production Technique: Creating the Accomplished Image. USA: Wadsworth. Merrill, J.G.

1994. The Imperative of Freedom. New York: Freedom House. Writing and Editing. New York: Allyn & Bacon.

Ingalls, A & Moody, D. 1997. Within Reach: A Guide to Successful Writing. New York: Allyn & Bacon. Salkind, N.J. 2009.

Page 87: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

87

Exploring Research. New Jersey: Pearson Education Inc.

CA10502 HISTORY OF DANCE

This course introduces students to the history and theories of dance art in Asia. With this knowledge students are able to

understand the process of creation and the source of the various dance that will assist them in reinforcing their performance.

References

Agus Tasman, 2006. Analisa Gerak dan Karakter: Surakarta: Sekolah Tinggi Seni Indonesia (STSI).

Margaret N. H Doubler, 2005. “Dance”: USA: University of Wincorsin Press Medison.

Soedarsono, 2000. Notasi Laban. Proyek Kesenian Direktorat Pembina Kesenian Ditijen Kebudayaan. Jakarta: Pepartemen

Pendidikan dan Kebudayaan.

CA23103 COMPOSITION AND CHOREOGRAPHY

This course allows students to learn about the key elements of producing good staging - from the use of space by dancers, music

and dance scores to the use of stage and technical tools. The combination of composition and choreography will produce a

dynamic and balanced visual staging. Students' theoretical knowledge will be strengthened through practical training.

References

Cheney, G. 1989. Basic Concepts in Modern Dance: A Creative Approach (3rd ed.). Princeton Book Co Pub. Franklin, E.N.

Dance Imagery for Technique and Performance. 2005. Human Kinetics (T). Franklin, E.N. 1997. Dynamic Alignment Through

Imagery. Human Kinetics (T).

Howse, J. & McCormack, M. 2000. Dance Technique and Injury Prevention (3rd ed.). Theatre Arts Books.

Todd, M.E. 2006. The Thinking Body: A Study of the Balancing Forces of Dynamic Man. Princeton Book Co Pub.

CA21202 DANCE ART TECHNIQUES II

This course is a continuation of the dance art techniques (i) course which provides exposure to more complex motion techniques.

The focus of learning is on the basic concepts of presentation techniques such as kinesthetic awareness, concentration / focus,

fluidity in movement transitions, clarity of ryhthmic acuity, spatial intent, full exploration of energy fluctuation and link of inner intent

to outer expression for complex movement techniques. In addition, students will also look at the aspects of alignment, strength and

flexibility of one's body. Students also have the opportunity to explore spaces controlled by different dynamics and rhythms and to

form appropriate phrases.

References

Cheney, G. 1989. Basic Concepts in Modern Dance: A Creative Approach (3rd ed.). Princeton Book Co Pub. Franklin, E.N.

Dance Imagery for Technique and Performance. 2005. Human Kinetics (T). Franklin, E.N. 1997. Dynamic Alignment Through

Imagery. Human Kinetics (T).

Howse, J. & McCormack, M. 2000. Dance Technique and Injury Prevention (3rd ed.). Theatre Arts Books.

Todd, M.E. 2006. The Thinking Body: A Study of the Balancing Forces of Dynamic Man. Princeton Book Co Pub.

CA21802 DANCE EDUCATION

This course demonstrates the role of practical knowledge in dance. Will be discussed is the epistemological approach, experience

Page 88: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

88

and social structuring of a knowledge, especially in dance education and training.

References

Azman Rahman Aroff & Zakaria Kasa. (2002). Falsafah dan Konsep Pendidikan (Edisi Kedua). Shah Alam: Fajar Bakti Sdn.Bhd.

Bressen, E.S. & Woollacott, M.H. (2004). A Prescriptive Paradigm For Sequencing Instruction in Physical Education. Human

Movement Science. 1. Holand: North Holland Publishing Company.

Gough, Mari on. (1999). Knowing Dance: A Guide for Creative Teaching. London: Cecil Court.

Salmah Ayob. (2005). Pergerakan Kreatif dan Pendidikan. Petaling Jaya: Flo Enterprise Sdn. Bhd.Istilah Pendidikan. Kuala

Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa & Pustaka.

CA30903 DANCE ETHNOLOGY

This course introduces and focuses on the understanding and understanding of dance culture in its entirety. By touching on

various disciplines such as sociology and anthropology, musicology, dance, folklore and so on, he hopes to help students

understand what dance is all about in the context of human behavior.

References

Cerron i-Long, E.L. (ed) (2002). Anthropological Theory in North America. London: Bergin & Garvey. Ely, Margotet.al. (1991).

Doing Qualitative Research: Circles Within Circles. London: Falmer Press. Gaillard, Gerald,. (2003). The Routledge Dictionary of

Anthropologists. New York: Routledge. Gingrich, Andre and Fox, Richard G. (2002). Anthropology, by Comparison. London:

Routledge.

Peregrine, Peter N. (1996). Ethnology Versus Ethnographic Analogy: A Common Confusion in Archaeological Interpretation.

Cross-Cultural Research. Vol 30.8

CA33702 DANCE ANALYSIS

This course focuses on ways to analyze an art performance, especially dance performance in terms of performance form,

performance pattern, movement technique, performance environment, performance uniqueness, performance weaknesses,

aesthetic values and disciplines associated in performance. This course allows students to follow the process of delivering critical

but constructive output in the context of writing about performing arts. Case study methods are used to achieve a satisfactory level

of learning.

References

Limputtong, P. and Ezzy, D. 2005. Qualitative Research Methods. Hongkong: Oxford University Press.

Agus Tasman, 2002. Analisa Gerak dan Karakter: Surakarta: Sekolah Tinggi Seni Indonesia (STSI).

Soedarsono, 1978. Pengantar Pengetahuan Dan Komposisi Tari: Yogyakarta: Akademi Seni Tari Indonesia. Soedarsono,

Komposisi Tari Elemen-Elemen dasar. 2003. Yogyakarta: Akademi Seni Tari Indonesia.

CA34302 EARLY PROJECT

This course exposes students to the process of preparing proposal papers for performing arts for dance and theater arts modules.

Students are exposed to create and study scripts / scripts and dance concepts that will be presented in the form of power point

presentations. Students will undergo two presentations to refine / strengthen the proposal paper to be brought to the final project

as a presentation work to be implemented in semester 6.

Page 89: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

89

References

Soedarsono,1978. Pengantar Pengetahuan Dan Komposisi Tari. Yogyakarta: Akademi Seni Tari Indonesia. Margaret

N.H’Doubler, 1989. Dance A Creative Art Experience. USA: University Of Winconsin Press Medison.

Judith Lynne Hanna Dance, 1988. Sex and Gender Sign Of Identity Dominance, Defiance And Desire. Chicago: University Of

Chicago Press.

La Meri oleh Soedarsono, 1975. Komposisi Tari Elemen-Elemen dasar. Yogyakarta: Akademi Seni Tari Indonesia. Umar Kayam,

1981. Seni, Tradisi, Masyarakat: Sinar Harapan.

Rustopo, 1991. Gendhon Humardani Pemikiran dan Kritiknya. Surakarta: STSI-Press.

Deddy Mulyana, 1990. Komunikasi Antarabudaya. Bandung: PT. remaja Rosdakarya Bandung.

CA32802 NOTATION DANCE

This course reveals a special writing system that records movement vocabulary in the form of scores or movement graphs.

Students will be taught how to make motion notations for a dance performance which will be used as a reference and manuscript

for the production of the second performance.

References

Ann Hutchinson. 2008. Labanotation or Kinetography Laban The System of Analyzing and Recording Movement. Revised and

Expanded third edition. New York: Theatre Arts Books.

Ann Hutchinson. 2005. Labanotation or Kinetography Laban The System of Analyzing and Recording Movement. Revised and

Expanded second edition. New York: Theatre Arts Books.

Joko Aswoyo. 1993. Notasi Laban Kajian Dan Penerapan Dalam Tari Tradisi Jawa. STSI Surakarta

Soedarso no., 1978-1979. Notasi Laban. Proyek Kesenian Direktorat. Jakarta: Pembina Kesenian Dirjen Kebudayaan

Departemen Pendidikan dan Kebudayaan

CA10603 BASIC ACTING

CA10603 Basic Acting This course is a basic acting course that focuses on the history of the development of acting art and an

introduction to an actor's self-preparation techniques. Students will be exposed theoretically and practically on the basis of existing

acting theory. This exposure is to enable students to make initial preparations before they focus in the theater module and learn in

depth about specific acting techniques.

References

Cassady, M. 1988. Acting; Step by Step. California. Resource Publications.

Hapgood, Elizabeth R. 1986. Constantin Stanislavski; An Actor Prepares. Great Britain. Methuen Drama. Berry, C. 1993. Voice

and the Actor. Great Britain. Virgin Books.

Scher Anna & Verrall,C. 1975. 100 + Ideas for Drama. Great Britain. Heinemann. Barkworth, P. 1991.

The Complete About Acting. USA. Metheun Drama.

Barker, C. 1995. Theatre Games. England. Methuen Drama.

Boal A. 1992. Games For Actors and Non-Actors. London. Routledge.

CA21702 PRODUCTION PROSEDUR I

This course focuses on the administrative management aspect in a theatrical production. Students majoring in the theater

component are required to participate in this field in addition to the other theater courses offered.

Page 90: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

90

References

Parker, W.O. 2003. Scene Design and Stage Lighting. USA. Wadsworth/Thompson Learning. Brockett, Oscar G. 1999.The

Essential Theatre, Florida. Harcourt Brace & Company.

Menear Pauline & Hawkins, T. 1988, Stage Management and Theatre Administration. Oxford. Phaidon Press Limited. Huxley

Michael & Witts, N. 1996. The Twentieth-Century Performance Reader. London. Routledge. Allain Paul & Harvie, J. 2006. Theatre

and Performance. London. Routledge.

CA21903 ACTING TECHNIQUE I

This course is an extension of the CA1122 Basics Course. Students will learn more about Stanislavski's modern play technique

known as the Play System. Apart from learning the theory and ethics of acting, character and character studies and body

preparation techniques in more depth, students are also asked to apply the techniques learned to the stage based on the

scenarios and theater scripts selected / determined.

References

Sohaimi Abdul Aziz 2003. Noordin Hassan; Anak Tanjung Pejuang Seni. Penerbit Universiti Sains Malaysia. Pulau Pinang.

Cassady, M. 1988. Acting; Step by Step. Resource Publications. California.

Brockett, Oscar G. 1999.The Essential Theatre, Belmont, CA. Wadsworth.

Schutzman Mady & Cohen-Cruz, J. 2003. Playing Boal; Theatre Therapy, Activism.Routledge, London. Babbage, F. 2004.

Augusto Boal. Routledge. London

CA 22603 ACTING TECHNIQUE II

This course is an extension of the CA21903 Skills of acting course . Students will focus on improvisational technique. The

multifaceted approach to improvisation using creative and spontaneous methods is ideal for applying to children's theater

performances. Students will be exposed for 14 weeks to the history of the emergence of improvisation techniques related to

Commedia del arte, body preparation, expression and gestures, up to performances based on selected / determined theater

scripts.

References

Samad Said. 1992. Lazri Meon. Dewan bahasa dan Pustaka, Kuala Lumpur. Cassady, M. 1988.

Acting; Step by Step. Resource Publications. California.

Hapgood, Elizabeth R. 1986. Constantin Stanislavski; An Actor Prepares. Methuen Drama, Great Britain. Berry, C. 1993. Voice

and the Actor. Virgin Books, Great Britain.

Mohammad Shahidan, 1997, Koleksi Terpilih Cerita Rakyat Malaysia.

CA34503 DIRECTORY I

This course will focus on the history of the emergence of directors, the authority, features and essentials of every theater director.

Directional theories by world theater activists such as Stanislavski, Grotowski Brecht and Robert William will be the basis of

discussion and practice. Students will also apply the theory of instruction learned by producing a theatrical performance.

References

Andika Aziz Hussin, 2008. Prosedur Pengurusan Produksi Teater. UMS, Sabah.

Page 91: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

91

Rodgers, James W. 1995. Play Director’s Survival Kit. The Centre for Applied Research in Education. New York. Catron, Louis E.

1989. The Director Vision. Mayfield Publishing Company. Mountain View, CA.

Brockett, Oscar G. 1999. The Essential Theatre, Belmont, Wadsworth, CA.

Menear Pauline & Hawkins, T.1988, Stage Management and Theatre Administration. Oxford. Phaidon Press Limited.

CA33902 TECHNICAL THEATER

This course will expose students to the importance of visual elements, especially the arrangement of light and sound in a theatrical

performance. Students will be exposed to the role of light and sound arrangement. Students will learn theory and practice about

each part as well as the role played by each part.

References

Parker W.O.2003. Scene Design and Stage Lighting.USA. Wadsworth/Thompson Learning.

J.Micheal Gillette.1999.Theatrical Design and Production.4th Edition. Mayfield Publishing Company. Mountain View, CA. Mc

Candless,S.1958. A Method of Lighting the Stage.Theatre Art Books. New York.

Menear Pauline & Hawkins, T.1988, Stage Management and Theatre Administration.Phaidon Press Limited. Oxford. Kaye, Deena

& Lebrecht,J.1992. Sound and Music for the Theatre. Back Stage Books. New York.

CA10703 INTRODUCTION TO THEATER

This course introduces students to the history of the europian classical theatre developments and its influences throughout the

world up to Malaysia. This course is divided into two parts, namely the historical development of Western theaters and the history

of the Malaysia theatres development. Students are also exposed to traditional theater forms and modern theater forms in

Malaysia.

References

Schecner, R. 2003. Performance Studies. London. Routledge.

Mohd Taib Osman. 1987. Kajian Budaya dan Masyarakat di Malaysia. Kuala Lumpur. Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka. Rahmah

Bujang. 1994. Drama Melayu; Dari Skrip ke Pentas. Kuala Lumpur. Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Mana Sikana. 2006. Drama Melayu Tradisional, Moden dan Pasca Moden. Kuala Lumpur. Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Solehah Ishak. 1990. Pengalaman Menonton Teater. Kuala Lumpur. Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka. Carlson, M. 1996.

Performance. London. Routledge

CA22202 TEATER EDUCATION

This course will expose students to the introduction of theatrical elements in education- spesifically in the teaching and learning

process both formally and informally. The different learning process from the conventional techniques that use only pens and

paper. Students will understand the history, development of TIE, issues and elements in TIE. Students will be trained to apply

these elements and produce a play to be presented to the audience. The success of the project will be assessed through the

reaction and involvement of the audience, especially the children.

References

Davis, Jed H. & Evans, Mary Jane, (1982), Theatre, Children and Youth, USA: Anchorage Press.

McCaslin, Nellie, (1971), Theatre for Children in the United States: A History, USA: University Of Oklahoma. Fiske, Pat S. &

Spealy, James L., (nd), Curtain Calls: Puppetry for Seniors, Austin Texas: University of Texas

Page 92: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

92

CA31603 STAGE SINOGRAPHY

This course will expose students to the process of making the artistic elements in a theatre performances, the importance of each

visual, kinetic and auditory elements present in a stage performances as well as its impact on the audience. Students will be

specifically exposed to how to make an artistic aspect synthesizes from a manuscript. Through this course students will also be

asked to watch some form of theater and they will need to make academic reviews of the visual, kinetic and auditory aspects of the

staging.

References

Brockett, Oscar G. 1999. The Essential Theatre, Belmont, CA. Wadsworth.

Catron, Louis E. 1989. The Director’s Vision. Mayfield Publishing Company. Mountain View, CA.

J.Michael Gillette. 1999. Theatrical Design and Production. 4th edition. Mayfield Publishing Company. Mountain View, CA. Kaye,

Deena & Lebrecht, J. 1992. Sound and Music for the Theatre. Back Stage Books. New York.

McCandless,S. 1958. A method of Lighting the Stage. Theatre Arts Books. New York.

Menear Pauline & Hawkins, T. 1988, Stage Management and Theatre Administration. Phaidon Press Limited. Oxford. Parker,

W.O. 2003. Scene Design and Stage Lighting. USA. Wadsworth/Thompson Learning.

CA33003 DIRECTORY II

This course is a continuation of the CA22803 Directing I course. At this stage students will delve into the theories they have

previously learned in practice. Students will be trained to identify and overcome problems in groups. Assessment of the self-

development stages will be seen through the weekly assessment of the production work process performed.

References

Andika Aziz Hussin, 2008. Prosedur Pengurusan Produksi Teater. UMS, Sabah.

Catron, Louis E. 1989. Play Director’s Vision. Mayfield Publishing Campany. Mountain View,CA.

Dean, Alexander. (1974). 3rd edition. Fundamentals of Play Directing. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston. Inc. Hodge, Francis.

(1994). 4th edition. Play Drama: Analysis, Communication and Style. New Jersey: Prentice Hall. Rodgers, James W. (1995). Play

Director’s Survival Kit. New York: The Centre for Applied Research in Education.

CA10103 HISTORY OF MALAY LITERATURE

The historical development of the Malay literature will be the focus of this course. Three main stages of the history of Malay

literature in Malaysia will be discussed; starting from the period of oral tradition (folk-literature), the period of Malay court literature

(classical Malay literature) to the period of new literary genre, like poem, short story and novel being introduced to the Malay world.

References

Ali Ahmad, Siti Hajar Che Man & Jelani Harun. 2005. Tasawwur Islam dalam Kesusasteraan Melayu Tradisional. Pulau

Pinang: Penerbit Universiti Sains Malaysia.

Li Chuan Siu. 1981. Ikhtisar Sejarah Pergerakan dan Kesusasteraan Melayu Moden: 1945-1965. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan

Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Safian Hussain , Mohd. Thani Ahmad dan Johan Jaafar (penye.). 2006. Sejarah Kesusasteraan Melayu . Kuala Lumpur: Dewan

Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Siti Hawa Hj Salleh. 1997. Kesusasteraan Melayu Abad kesembilan Belas. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka. Winstedt,

R.O. 1972. A History of Classical Malay Literature. Kuala Lumpur: Oxford University Press.

Page 93: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

93

CA20203 SCRIPT WRITING

This practical based course need the students to produce film script for either short movie, telemovie, fictional movie and

documentary. Students will be exposed to the creative process and scriptwriting format. Script elements such as story concept and

structure, conflict, character development and dialogue also will be discussed. To strengthen the scriptwriting process, several of

films will be screened and discussed by the students.

References

Seger, Linda. 2003. Advance Screenwriting. Silman James Press.

Krevolin, Richard. 2003. How to Adapt Anything into a Screenplay. John Wiley & Son. Miller, William. 1998.

Screenwriting for film and television. Allyn & Bacon.

Cole & Haag. 1999. The complete guide to standard script formats. 11th ed. CMC publishing. Froug, William. Zen and the art of

screenwriting. 1996. Silman-James Press.

CA22703 CREATIVE INDUSTRY MANAGEMENT

This course aims to expose the students to the various creative industries that exist within and outside the country. The exposure

will allow the students to choose and decide on the genre within creative industries which they wish to pursue further in their

preparation for the final project. Lectures will cover the structure of organization of both government and private bodies in creative

industries especially in the field of publishing, film, television, animation, fashion, advertisement, digital printing, book publication

etc. Among other areas that will be included are the fundamental policies that govern the creative industries.

References

Brown, Paul B. 2004. Publishing Confidential: The Insider's Guide to What It Really Takes to Land a Nonfiction Book Deal.

US: AMACOM.

Bilton, Chris. 200. Management and Creativity: From Creative Industries to Creative Management. Australia :

Wiley-Blackwell.

Mathieu, Chris. 2011. Careers in Creative Industries. US: Routledge.

Gordon Torr. 2008. Managing Creative People: Lessons in Leadership for the Ideas Economy. UK: Wiley & Sons. Caves, Richard

E.2002. Creative Industries: Contracts between Art and Commerce. US. Harvard University Press.

CA31003 MARKETING WORK

This course will expose students to the marketing concept which includes the concept of consumer behavior, purchase decision-

making process and marketing mix (4P). Discussion on marketing strategies using marketing mix (4p’s) namely, product, price,

place and promotion will be discuss in detail. Students will also be exposed to forms of business and product marketing. To ensure

that the students understand the concept of marketing, they are also required to produce the end product which has to do with the

field of the arts.

References

1. Armstrong, Gary & Kotler, Philip. 2005. Marketing : an introduction (international edition). Ed ke 5. Prentice-Hall.

2. Clow, Kenneth E & Baack, David. 2002. Integrated advertising, promotion & Marketing communication. Prentice Hall.

3. Crawford, Merle & Benedetto Anthony Di. 2003. New products management. 7th ed. McGraw Hill.

4. Dibb, Sally et. al. 2006. Marketing: concepts and strategies. Houghton Mifflin.

5. Hooley, Graham et.al. 2008. Marketing strategy and competitive positioning. Ed. Ke-4. Prentice Hall.

Page 94: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

94

VISUAL ARTS TECHNOLOGY PROGRAM (HA32)

CV10102 VISUAL ARTS TEXT ANALYSIS

This course exposes students to issues related to the essence of an object in the field of visual arts. Students are given practical

understanding to appreciate a design based on some theories of appreciation. Identify elements that can be associated with visual

art texts through exploration of observations and relate visible symbolic images to the environment. The form and the essence of

the work successfully explored and translated through experience, understanding and knowledge of art history. The basic

assessment methodology is through the aspects of description, formal analysis, interpretation and hypothesis. At the end of the

course, students create an appreciation of the work of two and three-dimensional systematically.

Reference

Dondis, D.A., (1995). A Primer of Visual Literacy (14th. edit). USA: MIT Press. Feldman, E.B., 1994. Varieties of Visual Experience

(3rd). New York: Prentice Hall. Lester, P.M. (1995). Visual Communication: Images With Messages. USA: Wadsworth

Publishing Company. Arnheim, R. (1969). Art and Visual Perception. Berkeley & Los Angeles: University of California Press.Bruce,

V. & R.Green, P. 1992. Visual Perception, Physiology, Psychlogy and Ecology (2ed.).United Kingdom: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates

Ltd. W. Richard (2015). Art and its Objects (2ed.). United Kingdom: Cambridge University Press.

CV10302 VISUAL LITERACY I

Visual literacy introduces analytical the language of visuals that include the basics of design art, design principles and design

structure. Research is practically focused on design basics using the skills of processing and understanding the elements of color,

lines, texture, space, form and shape in the production of two- and three-dimensional artworks. This artistic process enhances

maximum creativity and understanding in the production of works. The basic knowledge of design, design principles and structure

can enhance the understanding of work ethic through the exploitation of media creatively and innovatively.

Reference

Arnheim, R. 1969. Visual Thinking. Berkeley: University of California Press. Colin Ware. 2008. Visual Thinking for Design.

Burlington, Massachusetts: Morgan Kaufmann. Goodman, N. 1976. Languages of Art: An approach to a Theory of Symbols.

Indianapolis: Hackett.Lois Fichner-Rathus. 2014. Foundations of Art and Design. Boston: Cengage Learning. Nateman, D.S. 1994.

Introduction to Art. USA: McGraw-Hill. Joshua Field. 2018. An Illustrated Field Guide to the Elements and Principles of Art +

Design. Morrisville: Lulu.com. Jane Davies. 2017. Abstract Painting: The Elements of Visual Language. UK: Jane Davies

Publications.

CV10502 BASIC DRAWING I

This course introduces to basic drawing, equipment and materials. Students draw basic geometric and organic shapes by focusing

on the existence of light based on nature. Students are given skills in using the equipment, understanding basic drawing

techniques, exploiting media / dry materials, understanding of lines, tonals, threads, spaces, shapes, shapes and structure of

objects. Students are also introduced to the function of space through perspective lines and vanishing points with learning

methods outside the studio. At the end of the course, students will produce drawings based on natural and natural resources.

Page 95: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

95

Reference

Albert, G., Wolf, R. 1991. Basic Drawing Techniques. Cincinnati, Ohio: North Light Books. Betti, C., & Sale, T. 1997. Drawing A

Contemporary Approach. USA: Harcourt Brace College Pub. Bowen, R. 1992. Drawing Master Class. London: Leopard Books. Jenny

Rodwell. 1989. Drawing, USA: Hamlyn.Smolucha, L. 1996. The Visual Art Companion, New Jersey Prentice Hall. Florian

Afflerbach. 2014. Basics Freehand Drawing. Birkhauser, Basel, Switzerland: Bert Bielefeld.2018. Basics Detail Drawing, Birkhauser,

Basel, Switzerland: Alain Picard. 2016. Beginning Drawing: A multidimensional approach to learning the art of basic drawing.

Walter Foster Publishing, Laguna Hills, CA, United States.

CV10702 ARTS HISTORY & AESTHETIC I

This course provides theoretical and aesthetic knowledge of the development of the history of painting in the West from the

Renaissance to the present, the philosophy of Chinese painting, Indian Sculpture and Islamic architecture. Knowledge of western

art style and eastern art philosophy is revealed through examples of works in the form of paintings, sculptures and art objects that

exist in his era.

Reference

Jonathan, Lawrence. ( 2017). Gardner’s Art Through the Ages. The Western Perspective. USA: Cengage Learning Art. Kuo Hsi.

(1935). An Essay on Landscape Painting (translate by Shio Sakanishi). London: Murray. (70 pgs.) Merchant, Vasant V. (2003).

Siva-Nataraja: The Lord of the Dance, Drama and Music Siva-The Cosmic Dancer, Transformer, Liberator. Contributors Journal

article by; International Journal of Humanities and Peace, Vol. 19.(1). Rowland, Benjamin. (1953). The Art and Architecture of

India: Buddhist, Hindu, Jain. London: Penguin Books. (292 pgs.). Sherman E. Lee. (1962). Chinese Landscape Painting. Cleveland:

Cleveland Museum of Art.(160 pgs.) Seyyed Hossein Nasr. (1997). Islamic Spirituality: Manifestations (editor). New York:

Crossroad Herder.(548 pages). Tansey, R.G. & Kleiner, F.S. (1996). Art Through The Ages. USA: Harcourt Brace & Company.

CV10902 DIGITAL GRAPHIC PHOTO PRODUCTION I

This course provides basic understanding, principles, concepts and skills on digital graphic publishing through the use of computer

graphics software. Students learn about the history, characters, functions of the typograpy. In terms of skills in creating, planning,

developing and making a design. Skills in drawing, interpreting, choosing colors, letters and layouts. Students will be using Adobe

Photoshop and Adobe Illustrator software to produce artworks.

Reference

Alan & Isabella. 1994. Encyclopaedia Graphic design + Designer. New York: Thames and Hudson. Hollis, R. 1997. Graphic Design

A Concise History. London: Thames and Hudsan Ltd. Marcelle Lapow Toor. 1994. Graphic Design an the Desktop. Cornell

University.Thomson Publishing Naisbitt, John. 1999. High Tech High Touch. London: Nicholas Brealy Publishing House Lmt.

Velthoven, William. 1996. Multi-Media Graphics. London: Thame & Hudson Ltd. Dr. Muhammad Yaumi. 2017. Prinsip-Prinsip

Desain Pembelajaran. Kencana, Jakarta. David Dabner & Sandra Stewart 2017. Graphic Design School. Thames & Hudson Ltd,

London, United Kingdom.

CV10202 LITERACY VISUAL II

Students are exposed with the principles of design and structures, tto understand the concept of object production through

organized artistic methods and processes. Mastery and understanding of the elements of art, design principles and design

Page 96: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

96

structures can effectively increase the potential to work ethically through the exploitation of creative and innovative media.

Learning specifically to design principles through exploitation, media diversity and techniques help and improve students' abilities

in the context of producing a design.

Reference

Arnheim, R. 1974. Art and Visual Perception. Berkeley & Los Angeles: University of Californian Press. Capon, R. 1995.Drawing

Techniques. Morlborough: Crowood Press. Dodson, B. 1995. Key to Drawing. Cincinnati, Ohio: North Light Books. Mataznan. S.

1995. Drawing Nature. Cincinnati, Ohio: North Light Books. Turner, J.R. 1995. Drawing with Confidence. New York: Van Norstrand

Reinhold.Denman Waldo Ross. 2018. A Theory of Pure Design: Harmony, Balance, Rhythm. Wyoming (US): Creative Media

Partners, LLC.Jane Davies. 2017. Abstract Painting: The Elements of Visual Language. UK: Jane Davies Publications.

CV11002 BASIC DRAWING II

This course is an extension of the Basic Drawing (I) course. Students are exposed to a more detailed study emphasizing the basic

elements of drawing using various techniques and materials / media exploits on an object. Some real models in the studio are

studied with emphasis on analytical studies on anatomy, rate of appeal, perspective, shape and space. Exploitation of mixed media

in a composition enhances high interactive skills and creativity.

Reference

Betti, C., & Sale, T. 1997. Drawing A Contemporary Approach. USA: Harcourt Brace College Pub. Bowen, R. 1992. Drawing Master

Class. London: Leopard Books Dodson, B. 1995. Key to Drawing. Cincinnati, Ohio: North Light Books. Mataznan, S. 1995. Drawing

Nature. Cincinnati, Ohio: North Light Books.Turner, J.R. 1995. Drawing with Confidence. New York: Van Norstrand Reinhold.

Powell, W.F. 2020. Drawing Landscapes: Learn to draw Outdoor Scenes Step by Step. Walter Foster Publishing

CV10602 DIGITAL GRAPHIC PRODUCTION II

This course provides students with an understanding and skills in photography and image editing in graphic design through screen

display. Students explore basic photography skills in terms of techniques, methods and concepts of producing graphic artwork.

Students are given exposure to the publication of e-books aimed at documenting works in addition to sketches in the folio.

Reference

Pariah S. Burke. 2015. The Business of ePublishing 2015. CreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform; 1 edition. The Photoshop

Elements 2020 Book for Digital Photographers. 2020. Pearson Education. DK. 2016. Digital Photography Complete Course : Learn

Everything You Need to Know in 20 Weeks. DK Publishing Dorling Kindersley. Chris Gatcum. 2016. The Beginner's Photography

Guide: The Ultimate Step-By-Step Manual for Getting the Most from Your Digital Camera. DK Publishing Dorling Kindersley. Arntson, A.E. 1998. Graphic Design Basic. USA: Harcourt Brace College Pub. Cotton, Bob. 1993. Understanding Hypermedia –

From Multimedia to Vitural. Reality. London: Phaidon Press Ltd. Naisbitt, John. 1999. High Tech High Touch. London: Nicholas

Brealy Publishing House Lmt. Popper, Frank. 1993. Art in the Electronic Age, Thames & Hudson. Ltd. London Velthoven, William.

1996. Multi-Media Graphics. London: Thame & Hudson Ltd.

CV10802 CONCEPT AND CONTEXT IN DRAWING

This course trains students' visual observations contextually and textually from an object. Image observation from visible space is

Page 97: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

97

processed directly through the retina of the eye which stimulates the mind to interpret critically. Digestion of this image is then

translated onto the surface of the paper. The production of sequential image translation through analytical observation process

can explain the concept of drawing / sketch that meets the objectives of the Artistic Process. At the end of the course, students

can fully translate the sketch of the artistic process as a result of critical observation of the object / subject in focus.

Reference

Bruce, V. & R.Green, P. 1992. Visual Perception, Physiology, Psychlogy and Ecology (2ed.).United Kingdom: Lawrence Erlbaum

Associates Ltd. Dondis, D.A., (1995). A Primer of Visual Literacy (14th. edit). USA: MIT Press.Mannoni, L., Nekes, W. & Warner,

M. (eds). 2004. Eyes, Lies and Illusions. The Art of Deception. Ashgate Publishing Limited.Pye, M. (1987).Jil, Helen., (2017).

Collactive and Collaborative Drawing in Contemporary practice: Drawing Conversations. New Castle Upon Tyne, United Kingdom:

Cambridge Scholars Publishing. Whose Art Is It Anyway?. New York: Connoisseur.Zelansky,P & Pat Fisher, M. (2002). The Art of

Seeing (5th ed). New Jersey: Prentice Hall.

CV22802 PAINTING

This course exposes students to techniques and media in the production of paintings. Students are exposed to the process,

concepts and flow of paintings. Students will also study colors, study the effects of light on surfaces, perform color mixing

experiments and find new techniques. Students experiment with mediums that becomes the media in paintings such as

watercolors, oil paints, acrylics, poster paints, tempera paints and mixed media. At the end of the course, students will produce

works that fulfill the concepts and disciplines in the production of paintings.

Reference

Dondis, D.A., 1995. A Primer of Visual Literacy (14th. edit). USA: MIT Press. Hunter, S. & Jacobus, J. 1992. Modern Art. USA:

Prentice Hall Lester, P.M. 1995. Visual Communication: Images With Messages. USA: Wadsworth Publishing Company. Rosalind

Kagen, 2000. Art Talk, McGraw-Hill Smolucha. L. 1996.The Visual Art Companion. New Jersey Prentice Hall. Powell, W.F. 2020.

Drawing Landscapes: Learn to draw Outdoor Scenes Step by Step. Walter Foster Publishing

CV21302 BASIC 2D ANIMATION

This course exposes students to the basics in the production of two-dimensional (2D) animation works. This course focuses on the

elements and principles of animation such as 12 principles of animation, character formation, movement and time. Students are

also exposed to the stages of the animation production process which are pre-production, production and post-production. This

course also touches on the introduction to the types of animation including computer animation that is suitable for the current

industry.

Reference

Alan Cholodenko. 1993. The Illusion Of Life: Essays on Animation, Bloomington, IN:Indiana UP. Paul Wells. 1988. Understanding

Animation, New York.Popper, Frank. 1993. Art in the Electronic Age. Thames & Hudson, Ltd. London Robert Russett and Cecile

Starr. 1988. Experimental Animation: Origins of a New Art, New York: Da Capo. Pooper, Frank.2006. Art in the

Electronic Age :Second Edition. London : Thames & Hudson Ltd.Wells & Moore. 2016. The Fundamental of Animation.

New York: Blommsburry Publishing Inc. Herhuth, Eric. 2017. Pixar and the Aesthetic Imagination; Animation, Storytelling, and

Digital Culture. California: University of California Press

Page 98: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

98

CV22902 DRAWING

This course exposes students to the techniques and media in the production of paintings. Students are exposed to the process,

concept and genre paintings artwork. Students will also study color, studying the effects of light on the surface, mixing colors to

experiment and find new techniques. Students experiment with the medium as a media in paintings such as watercolor, oil,

acrylic, poster paints, tempera paint and mixed media. At the end of the course students will produce works that meet the

concepts and disciplines in the production of paintings.

Reference

Betti, C., & Sale, T. 1997. Drawing A Contemporary Approach. USA: Harcourt Brace College Pub. Bowen, R. 1992. Drawing Master

Class. London: Leopard Books Dodson, B. 1995. Key to Drawing. Cincinnati, Ohio: North Light Books. Mataznan. S. 1995. Drawing

Nature. Cincinnati, Ohio: North Light Books. Turner, J.R 1995. Drawing with Confidence. New York: Van Norstrand Reinhold.

Powell, W.F. 2020. Drawing Landscapes: Learn to draw Outdoor Scenes Step by Step. Walter Foster Publishing

CV21702 EXPLORATION OF INDIGENOUS ART

This course emphasizes on qualitative research methods in the field in relation to the traditional arts that are still practiced by the

Sabah Indigenous community. Students are exposed to the discipline and procedures to obtain current information in the field and

then report their findings. Direct observation is implemented in craft production traditional handicrafts such as traditional wood

carving, traditional costume making, production of traditional coloring materials, and other related artistic aspects. Research

conducted in groups outside the campus area and focuses on a particular place and tribe. The findings will be presented through a

symposium, colloquium or forum.

Reference

Elizabeth & Alman. (1963). Handcraft in North Borneo. Jesselton: Sabah Publishing House. Ismail Ibrahim, etal. (2013). Warisan

Seni dan Budaya Masyarakat Kepulauan Pesisir Sabah. Kota Kinabalu:Universiti Malaysia Sabah. Ismail Ibrahim. (2007). Motif dan

Corak Etnik Sabah. Kota Kinabalu: Universiti Malaysia Sabah. Mohamad Najib Abdul Ghafar. (1999). Penyelidikan Pendidikan.

Johor Bahru: Universiti Teknologi Malaysia. Whitehead, J. (1991). Exploration of Mount Kinabalu. North Borneo. Kota Kinabalu:

Yayasan Sabah.Carole Gray, Julian Malins. 2016. Visualizing Research: A Guide to the Research Process in Art and Design. Norfolk,

UK: Routledge.

CV21902 DIGITAL AUDIO VIDEO PRODUCTION I

This course provides students with an understanding and skills on the basics of digital audio and video in the film, television,

animation industries. Technical skills of cameras, storyboards, computer hardware, audio software and video editing. Students are

trained in the production of professional audio and video ideas.

Reference

Wallace Jackson. 2015. Android Studio New Media Fundamentals: Content Production of Digital Audio/Video, Illustration and 3D

Animation. aPress. Terry T. Gisna. 2018. How to Create Information Products 101: Beginners Quick Guide to Creating Video

Courses, Audios, and eBooks in Digital Format That Can Make You $10 to 1,000+ Per Sale. Independently Published.

ISBN10 1728744687. ISBN13 9781728744681. Alex Anderson. 2015. Create Video/Audio on Your Product: Facilities of Making

Video/Audio on Product. Createspace. ISBN10 1505942837. ISBN13 9781505942835. Cleve, Bastian. 2005. Film Production

Page 99: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

99

Management, 3rd ed. Focal Press.James, Jack. 2006. Digital intermediates for film and video. USA: Focal Press.Lyver, Des &

Swainson, Graham. 2002. Basics of Video Production, 2nd ed. Focal Press.Whitaker, Jerry. 2002. Master Handbook of Video

Production. McGraw-Hill Professional.

CV21002 GALLERY AND EXHIBITION MANAGEMENTS

This course aims to expose students to professional gallery and exhibition management skills. Students understand the context of

galleries and operate effective management planning, acquisition and preservation of the art infrastructure. In addition, the

opportunity to do practical training related to staging planning and exhibition projects in groups. At the end of the course students

will hold a session of criticism and appreciation.

Reference

Bellman, W.F. 1974. Lighting the Stage: Art and Practice. New York: Crowell.Blau, H. 1992. To All Appearance : Ideologi and

Performance. USA: Rouledge & Kegan Paul.Hartley, John. 2005. Creative Industries (edit). Brisbane, Australia: Blackwell

Publishers.Robertson. 2005. Understanding International Art Markets And Management. London: Routledge Lorenc.Cher Krause

Khight, Harriet F. Senis., (2018). Museums and Public Art?. New Castle Upon Tyne, United Kingdom: Cambridge Scholars

Publishing.

CV21202 BASIC 3D ANIMATION

This course touches on the basic concepts of model construction in 3D animation as a whole. It explains how 3D models in

animation are built, types, and ways of applying mesh models, materials, lighting, texture mapping, rendering methods, cloth,

hair, and special effects. This course introduces the basics of 3D model making before students produce a final project. The

platform used for the production of 3D animated models is Macintosh or PC Platform, in addition to the use of open-source

software: Blender, and the introduction to Maya and 3D Studio Max.

Reference

Allan Cholondenko. (2002). The Illusion of Life: Essay of Animation, Second Edition. Bloominton, IN:Indianan UP. Paul Wells.

(1998). Understanding Animation, New York. Baechler, O., & Greer, X. (2020). Blender 3D By Example: A project-based guide to

learning the latest Blender 3D, EEVEE rendering engine, and Grease Pencil, 2nd Edition. Packt Publishing. Brito, A. (2019). Blender

2.8: The beginner’s guide. Independently published. Legaspi, C. (2015). Anatomy for 3D Artists: The Essential Guide for CG

Professionals (3dtotal Publishing, Ed.). 3DTotal Publishing. Valenza, E. (2015). Blender 3D Cookbook: Build your very own

stunning characters in Blender from scratch. Packt Publishing. Villar, O. (2014). Learning Blender: A Hands-On Guide to Creating

3D Animated Characters (1 edition). Addison-Wesley Professional.

CV21402 BASIC ADVERTISING

This course introduces the basics of advertising and advertising art design. It emphasizes the principles, concepts of advertising,

definition, organization within the agency, analyzing the strategy of an advertisement in a contemporary and digital tradition.

Students will be exposed to the history, figures and case studies of previous advertising. Students are also introduced to the types

of advertising such as promotion advertisements, service advertisements (PSA) and corporate advertisements. In terms of skills,

students will conduct filming sessions to succeed a commercial TV commercial, corporate advertisement or service advertisement.

Page 100: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

100

Reference

Anholt, S. (2003). Brand New Justice: The Upside of Global Branding. Oxford, Boston: Butterworth-Heinemann.Belch, G.E. &

Belch, M. (2001). Advertising and Promotions. Boston: McGraw-Hill Himpe, T. (2008 ). Advertising Next. San Francisco, California:

Chronicle Books.O’ Guinn, T.C., Chris, T.A. & Semenik, R.J. (2003). Advertising & Integrated Brand Promotion. 3rd ed. Australia:

Thomson South-Western. Zimmerman, J. (2003). Marketing On the Internet: Your Seven-Step Plan for Succeeding in E-Business.

Now That the Hype Is Over. New York: Gulf Breeze Maximum Press. David Ogilvy, (2013) Ogilvy on Advertising. Knopf Doubleday

Publishing Group: Shelly Rodgers, Esther Thorson. (2017) Digital Advertising. Routledge.

CV34103 COLLABORATIVE PROJECT

This course emphasizes on students about generating personal ideas and concepts, innovative exploration and new discoveries.

Students are also required to produce collaborative project papers and are encouraged to seek guidance from their respective

supervisors. This course is the initial stage of MATRIX project production. Students will produce projects of their choice based on

previously mastered courses. Students will experiment, research and generate ideas by implementing elements of IT and

multimedia skills. At the end of the course, students will produce a work proposal (mock up). Recommendations for this work will

be extended to the CT30406 Final Project course as a final project.

Reference

Burstein D. & Stasiowski F. 1992. Project Management For The Design Professional.Whitney Library of Design London. Martha

Metzdorf. 1990. The Ultimate Porfolio, Cincinnati, Ohio, USA. Nikos Stangos. 1993. Concepts of Modern Art: From Fauvism to

Postmodernism, Thames & Hudson Ltd London. Paula Sher. 1992. The Graphic Design Porfolio, Watson Guptill Publication, New

York. Veronica Napoles. 1993. Product Design and Corporate Strategy, McGraw-Hill Inc. USA.

CV21602 BATIK

This course provides exposure on design of textile technology specific to batik art. Students study and research R&D on the

motives, techniques and processes of producing printed batik and batik canting. Understanding their patterns from a variety of

motives by paying attention to functions, cultural values and finishing. Learning knowing tools and materials and getting to know

some of the leading figures in textile craft.

Reference

Ball, Kazz and Janitch, Valerie. 1994. Hand Painted Textiles For The Home. Singapore: Saik Wah Press Pte. Ltd.Noor Azlina

Yunus. 2012. Malaysian Batik: Reinventing a Tradition. North Clarendon, Vermont: Tuttle Publishing.Siti Zainon Ismail. 1994.

Malay Woven Textiles. Malaysia: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.Philips, Peter and Bunce, Gillian. 1993. Repeat Patterns A Manual

Designers Artists & Architects. London: Thames & Hudson Ltd. Venables, Jane. 1994. The Silk Painting Workshop, Painting,

Marbling & Batik For Beginners. Italy: David & Charles Ltd. Lizzie King. 2017. Tie & Dye: Colourful clothing, gifts and decorations.

London: Pavilion Books.

CV22002 GRAPHIC ILLUSTRATION

This course provides students with the understanding and skills of digital graphic illustration concepts. This course introduces

illustrations, types, functions of illustrative images in a work. Students are introduced to the characteristics and principles of

illustration to produce a digital illustration work based on the concept of discipline in the industrial sector such as automobile

illustration, fashion, cartoons, characters and medicine. Students are exposed to the skills of using computer software and digital

Page 101: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

101

computer production techniques to equip students with skills in line with current industry needs.

Reference

Male, A. (2019). Companion to Illustration: Art and Theory. John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Embury, G & Minichiello, M. (2018).

Reportage Illustration : Visual Journalism. London : Bloomsbury Publishing.Inc, Zeegen, L (2010). Complete Digital Illustration: A

Master Class in Image-Making, RotoVision SA, Zeegen, L (2009). What Is Illustration?, RotoVision SA, DiMarco, J. (2010). Digital

Design for Print and Web: An Introduction to Theory, Principles, and Techniques. John Wiley & Sons, Inc, Armstrong, H. (2016).

Digital Design Theory: Readings from the Field, New York: Princeton Architectural Press, Lupton, E & Philips, J.(2008). Graphic

Design: The New Basics, 2nd Edition, New York: Princeton Architectural Press.

CV22302 ARTS HISTORY & AESTHETIC II

This course provides the theoretical knowledge in relation to the historical development of the painting in Malaya began in the

1930s to the post-Merdeka and Sabah developments in painting began in the 1940s to the present. The style of presentation of

each era is revealed through examples of works in the form of paintings, art prints and sculptures.

Reference

Ahmad Rashidi Hasan. (2001). Sejarah Seni Lukis. Shah Alam: Karisma Publications. Galeri Petronas. (2016). Young Malaysian

Artists : New Object (ION 111). Kuala Lumpur : Institut Terjemahan & Buku Malaysia. Ismail Ibrahim. (2005). Sejarah

Perkembangan Senilukis Sabah. Kota Kinabalu: Universiti Malaysia Sabah. Muliyadi Mahamood. (2001). Senilukis Moden Malaysia.

Kuala Lumpur: Utusan Publication & Distributor Sdn Bhd. Redza Piyadasa. (2001). Rupa Malaysia: Meninjau Seni Lukis Moden

Malaysia. Kuala Lumpur: Balai Seni Lukis Negara. Muliyadi Mahamood. (2007). Modern Malaysian Art: From The Pioneering Era To

The Plurlist Era. Kuala Lumpur: Utusan Publication & Distributor Sdn Bhd.

CV22902 CERAMIC

This course aims to provide students with fundamental knowledge of hand-construction techniques to work with clay. On the

course, student should learn techniques such as slab construction, pinching, and coiled clay to 3 dimension (3D) shape or

sculptural works of art. Student will discover communities and artists that used specific techniques. Student can also work with a

range of decorative techniques to incorporate texture and/or written imagery; use colored slips and glazes.

Reference

George Savage, Harold Newman, 1999. An Illustrated Dictionary of Ceramics, Thames & Hudson Jenny Rodwell. Voyageur Press.

Jacqui Atkin, 2013. Handbuilt Pottery Techniques Revealed: The Secrets of Handbuilding Shown in Unique Cutaway Photography,

B.E.S.; 2 edition John Gale, 2001. Pottery- Teach Yourself, Mc Graw-Hill. Neal French. Kathy Triplett, 2001. Handbuilt Tableware:

Making Distinctive Plates, Bowls, Mugs, Teapots and More: (A Lark Ceramics Book) Lark Books; First Edition. Susan Halls, 2014.

Pinch Pottery: Functional, Modern Handbuilding, Lark Crafts. Sunshine Cobb, 2018. Mastering Hand Building: Techniques, Tips,

and Tricks for Slabs, Coils, and More (Mastering Ceramics)

CV33502 WEB INTERACTIVE

This course discusses the basic concepts, principles and techniques of website development. This course is important because it

provides understanding and skills to students about designing websites using multimedia authoring software, programming

Page 102: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

102

languages, upload results online on the web site as well as training students to produce ideas and skills in an interactive website.

Reference

Shelly, G., Napler, H. & Rivers, O. (2009). Web Design: Introductory Concepts and Techniques. 3rd edition, Boston: Course

Technology, Cengage Learning. Shelly, G & Campbell, J. (2012). Web Design: Introductory, 4th Edition, Boston: Course

Technology, Cengage Learning. Beaird, J & George, J. (2014). The Principles of Beautiful Web Design. 3rd Edition. SitePoint Pty.

Ltd. Ford, R. & Wiedermann, J. (2019). Web Design. The Evolution of the Digital World 1990-Today. Taschen GmbH. McIntire, P.

(2008). Visual Design for the Modern Web. Pearson Education. Scott, B & Neil, T. (2009). Designing Web Interfaces: Principles

and Patterns. O’Reilly Media Inc. DeFeterici, G. (2012). The Web Designer's Roadmap. SitePoint Pty. Ltd.

CV33902 CERAMIC TECHNOLOGY

The course gives students basic an understanding of the relationship between ceramic material concepts and the use of these

materials in pottery designs and applications. The course will also describe the interaction between the manufacturing process and

the selection of materials and the need for a collaborative approach to works of art.

Reference

Jacqui Atkin, 2017. Beginner's Guide to Pottery & Ceramics: Everything you need to know to start making beautiful ceramics.

Search Press Judith S. Schwartz, 2008. Confrontational Ceramics. A & C Black Publishers Ltd Marylin Scott, 2006. Potter's Bible: An

Essential Illustrated Reference for both Beginner and Advanced Potters (Artist/Craft Bible Series) Chartwell Books Peter Cosentino,

2018. The Encyclopedia of Pottery Techniques: A unique visual directory of pottery techniques, with guidance on how to use them

Search Press; Reprint edition Tom Morris, 2018. New Wave Clay: Ceramic Design, Art and Architecture. Frame Publishers

CV32102 DIGITAL AUDIO VIDEO PRODUCTION II

This course introduces students' principles and practices on advanced digital video audio and trains students to develop ideas and

skills in producing professional audio and video. The production of short films, documentaries, animations and other multimedia

designs is the focus in providing skills to students.

Reference

Scorpio Digital Press. 2020. Independent Production House Startup Guide : How to Make Audio, Video, Movie and Advertisement -

Advertising Industry I Film Production Technique - Entertainment and Promotion. Independently Published. Emergent Learning.

2017. Learning Audio and Video Production Student Edition -- VitalSource eText – National. Pearson. Jim Foust, Edward J. Fink,

Lynne Gross. 2017. Video Production: Disciplines and Techniques. Routledge. Harry C. Box. 2020. Set Lighting Technician’s

handbook: Film Lighting Equipment, Practice, and Electrical Distribution. Taylor & Francis Ltd. Bruce Bennett, Marc Furstenau &

Adrian Mackenzie. 2008. Cinema and Technology, Cultures, Theories, Practices. Palgrave Macmillan Blain Brown. Cinematography,

Theory & Practice, Image Making for Cinematographers, Directors, and Videographers. Focal Press. Ettedgui, Peter.

Cinematography: Screencraft. 2000. Focal Press.Jones, et. Al. Film into Video. 2000. Focal Press. Louis Giannetti. Understanding

Movies, 9th Edition. 2002. Prentice Hall.

CV33702 2D ANIMATION

The 2D Animation Course is an extension of the Basic 2D Animation course (CV21302). This course touches on the concept of 2D

Page 103: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

103

animation as a whole and explains the process of generating 2D animation, the types and applications of the process of animation

production in depth. This course is thoroughly explained before students produce the final project. The platform used for 2D

animation production is 2D computerized animation software.

Reference

Alan Cholodenko. 1993. The Illusion Of Life: Essays on Animation, Bloomington, IN:Indiana UP. Paul Wells. 1988. Understanding

Animation, New York.Popper, Frank. 1993. Art in the Electronic Age. Thames & Hudson, Ltd. London Robert Russett and Cecile

Starr. 1988. Experimental Animation: Origins of a New Art, New York: Da Capo. Pooper, Frank.2006. Art in the Electronic

Age:Second Edition. London : Thames & Hudson Ltd.Wells & Moore. 2016. The Fundamental of Animation. New York:

Blommsburry Publishing Inc. Herhuth, Eric. 2017. Pixar and the Aesthetic Imagination; Animation, Storytelling, and Digital Culture.

California: University of California Press

CV33302 3D ANIMATION

The 3D Animation Course is an extension of the 3D Animation Basic Course (CV21202). This course touches on the concept of 3D

animation as a whole and explains how 3D animation is produced, the types, and ways to apply the 3D animation production

process in depth. Among the techniques touched on are Key Framing, Rigging, Posing, rigid body dynamics, Path animation,

motion capture, particle system, fluid animation, deformation, hair, cloth, and soft bodies. Students will use open-source software:

Blender, in addition to introductions to MAYA and 3D Studio Max. This course is thoroughly explained before students produce the

final project.

Reference

Baechler, O., & Greer, X. (2020). Blender 3D By Example: A project-based guide to learning the latest Blender 3D, EEVEE

rendering engine, and Grease Pencil, 2nd Edition. Packt Publishing. Brito, A. (2019). Blender 2.8: The beginner’s guide.

Independently published. Legaspi, C. (2015). Anatomy for 3D Artists: The Essential Guide for CG Professionals (3dtotal Publishing,

Ed.). 3DTotal Publishing. Valenza, E. (2015). Blender 3D Cookbook: Build your very own stunning characters in Blender from

scratch. Packt Publishing.Villar, O. (2014). Learning Blender: A Hands-On Guide to Creating 3D Animated Characters (1 edition).

Addison-Wesley Professional.

CV32503 BORNEO ETHNICS ARTS ANALYSIS

This course gives exposure to several aspects of arts among ethnics inhabiting the Borneo Archipelago, especially in Sabah.

Students are required to identify and scrutinize on issues related to traditional objects and cultures within Borneo for research

materials. Subsequently, the students are to analyze the concepts and creation techniques; influences of motives and materials;

decorative elements; and design concepts in the context of contemporary and traditional. At the end of the course, students would

be able to successfully synthesize the research by expressing it through visual communication posters.

Reference

Elizabeth & Alman. (1963). Handcraft in North Borneo. Jesselton: Sabah Publishing House.Harrisson, Tom & Harrisson, B.(1969-

1970). “The Prehistory of Sabah.” Sabah Society Journal. Vol.4 .Ismail Ibrahim. (2013). Warisan Motif dan Corak Etnik MURUT

(2ed). Kota Kinabalu : Universiti Malaysia Sabah. Whitehead, J. (1991). Exploration of Mount Kinabalu. North Borneo. Kota

Kinabalu: Yayasan Sabah.Roth, Henry Ling. (1968). The Natives of Sarawak and British North Borneo Vol.(I),(II). Singapore:

University of Malaya. Carole Gray, Julian Malins. 2016. Visualizing Research: A Guide to the Research Process in Art and Design.

Norfolk, UK: Routledge.

Page 104: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

104

CV34503 COMPOSITION TECHNOLOGY

This course prepares students to understand the basics of composition technology through the use of computer and VFX software

used by film companies and home studios. This course introduces students to the arts and sciences in composite visual effects for

digital filmmaking. Topics to be studied include visual effects workflow, imaging technology, green screen, image processing,

matte production, and tracking. Also, students will learn the production of composition technology (practical) with computer

software ranging from recording, mixing, use of effects, and mastering. Through this course, students present their work either

individually or in groups.

Reference

Lanier, L. (2015). Compositing Visual Effects in After Effects: Essential Techniques (1 edition). Routledge. Meyer, C., & Meyer, T.

(2010). Creating Motion Graphics with After Effects: Essential and Advanced Techniques, 5th Edition, Version CS5 (5 edition).

Routledge. Vepakomma, M. (2014). Blender Compositing and Post Processing. Packt Publishing. Wright, S. (2010). Digital

Compositing for Film and Video, Third Edition (3 edition). Focal Press. Wright, S. (2017). Digital Compositing for Film and Video:

Production Workflows and Techniques (4 edition). Routledge.

Page 105: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

105

ISLAMIC STUDIES PROGRAMMES (HI15)

AI10103 INTRODUCTION TO THE ISLAMIC STUDIES

This course discusses the meaning and characteristics of Islam. Focus is given to the sources of Islamic

studies, the scope of Islamic studies which include faith, morals and sharia. The course also discusses

current issues involving the Islamic studies and contemporary challenges faced in the field of Islamic

studies.

References

Mustafa Muslim. 2007. Al-Thaqafah al-Islamiyyah. Al-Riyad: Ithra’ Linnasr wa al-Tauzie’.

Al-Syafie, Hasan Mahmud. 2001. Al-Madkhal Ilā Dirāsat Ilm al-Kalam. Karachi: Idarah al-Quran wa al-Ulum al-Islamiyyah.

cAlī Jumcah, Muḥammad. t.th. Al-Madkhal Ilā Dirāsat al-Madhāhib al-Fiqhiyyah. Al-Qāhirah: Dār al- Salām.

Mahmood Zuhdi Abd. Majid. 1992. Sejarah Pembinaan Hukum Islam. Kuala Lumpur: Penerbit Universiti Malaya.

Al-Khudarī Bek, Muhammad. 1995. Tārīkh al-Tashīrc al-Islāmī. Bayrūt: Dār al-Kutub al-cIlmiyyah.

Al-Ghanimi, Abu al-Wafa’. T.th. al-Madkhal Ila al-Tasawwuf al-Islami. Kaherah: Dar al-Thaqafah.

AI20903 FIQAH IBADAT

This course discusses the problem of general and special worship such as prayer, fasting, zakat and hajj. Debate specifically refers

to the views of the Shafi'i school, besides giving an overview and exposure on some of the views of other denominations or

Mazhab.

References

Al-Sharbinī, al-Khāṭīb. 1958. Mughnī al-Muḥtāj. Miṣr: al-Ḥalabī.

Sābiq, Al-Sayyid. 1983. Fiqh al-Sunnah. Bayrūt: Dār al-Fikr.

Al-Khin, Muṣṭafā; al-Bughā, Muṣtafā & al-Shurbajī. 1987. Al-Fiqh al-Manhaj cAlā al- Madhhab al-Imām al-Shāfici. Dimashq: Dār al-

Qalam.

Al-Shuqfah, Khālid. 1989. Kitāb al-Dirāsah al-Fiqhiyyah cAlā Madhhab Shafie. Miṣr: Dār Salām.

Al-Jazīrī, cAbd Raḥman ibn Muḥammad. 2000. Al-Fiqh cAlā Madhāhib al-Arbacah. Riyāḍ: Dār Ihyā’ al-Turāth al-cArabī

AI10403 SCIENCE OF AL-QURAN

This course discusses the sciences related to the Quran cover matters of revelation, the decline in the Quran and the rank-ranked,

collection and compilation of verses in the Quran, the advantages of the Quran (Icjāz), repeal paragraph or law (Abrogation) in

the Quran and the reason decrease.

References

Al-Suyūṭī, Jalāluddīn cAbd al-Raḥman. t.th. Al-Itqān Fī cUlūm al-Qur’an. Dimashq: Dār Ibn Kathīr.

Al-Zarqānī, Al-Sayyid Muḥammad cAbd cAzīm. t.th. Manāhil al-cUrfān Fī cUlūm al-Qur’an. Al-Qāhirah: Dār al-Kutub al-cArabiyyah Al-

Qaṭṭan, Mannāc. t.th. Mabāḥith Fī cUlūm al-Qur’an. Bayrūt: Mu’assasat al-Risālah.

Al-Wahidi, al-Imām Abī al-Ḥasan cAlī. t.th. Asbāb al-Nuzul al-Qur’an. Bayrūt: Dār al-Kutub al-cIlmiyyah.

Page 106: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

106

AI20503 ISLAMIC TOUGHT

This course is generally a discussion on aspects of divinity, Qada and Qadar, human act, belief in prophets and messengers and

the scriptures revealed by God (S.W.T). Also discussed supernatural things (samciyyāt) in addition to issues of faith in life.

References

Al-Jazirā, Abū Bakar Jābir. t.th. cAqīdah al-Mu’min. t.tp: Dār al-Kitāb al-Salafiyyah.

Sayyid Sābiq. t.th. Al-cAqīdah al-Islāmiyyah. Bayrūt: Dār al-Kitāb al-cArabī.

Said Ḥawa. 1981. Allāh Jalla Jalālah. Dimashq: Dār al-Qalam.

cAtiyyah, Muḥammad. 1990. Al-cAqīdah al-Islāmiyyah. Urdūn: Dār al-Fikr.

Al-Ashqar, cUmar Sulaymān. 1990. Al-Qaḍā’ wa al-Qadar. Kuwait: Dār al-Nafāis.

Al-Maydanī, cAbd al-Raḥman Ḥasan. 1994. Al-cAqīdah al-Islāmiyyah wa Uṣūluha. Dimashq: Dār al-Qalam.

Ḥasan, Ayūb. 1994. Tabsīṭ al-cAqācid al-Islāmiyyah al-Qāhirah: Dār al-Tawzīc.

AI10203 ARABIC SYNTAX 1

The course was introduced as a requirement to learn the discipline of the religious sciences as the main reference language.

Students are exposed to the works of classical Arabic grammar and can see a comparison and differences of opinion of the

scholars of Arabic grammar in understanding the text of Quran and Sunnah as well as classic works of others in the discipline of

knowledge of Islamic studies.

References

Ḥassan, cAbbās. 1963. al-Naḥw al-Wāfi. t.tp: t.pt.

Al-Ghulayaynī, Muṣṭafā. 1993. Jāmic al-Durus al-cArabiyyah. Bayrūt: Al-Maktabah al-Asriyyah.

Jāmil Aḥmad Zafar. 1998. Al-Naḥw al-Qur’anī. Makkah: Maṭābic al-Ṣafa.

Al-Hāshimī, Aḥmad. 1998. Al-Qawācid al-Asāsiyyah Li al-Lughah al-cArabiyyah. Bayrūt: Al-Maktabah al-Asriyyah.

Al-Rajihī, Abduh. 1999. Al-Taṭbīq al-Naḥw. Riyāḍ: Maktabah al-Macārif Li al-Nashr wa al-Tawzīc.

AI20303 ARABIC SYNTAX 2

This course is a continuation of the Nahu 1 course in addition to major topics in Arabic syntax or grammar.

References

Ḥassan, cAbbās. 1963. al-Naḥw al-Wāfi. t.tp: t.pt.

Al-Ghulayaynī, Muṣṭafā. 1993. Jāmic al-Durus al-cArabiyyah. Bayrūt: Al-Maktabah al-Asriyyah.

Jāmil Aḥmad Zafar. 1998. Al-Naḥw al-Qur’anī. Makkah: Maṭābic al-Ṣafa.

Al-Hāshimī, Aḥmad. 1998. Al-Qawācid al-Asāsiyyah Li al-Lughah al-cArabiyyah. Bayrūt: Al-Maktabah al-Asriyyah.

Al-Rajihī, Abduh. 1999. Al-Taṭbīq al-Naḥw. Riyāḍ: Maktabah al-Macārif Li al-Nashr wa al-Tawzīc

AI21003 ARABIC MORPHOLOGY

The course was introduced as a requirement to learn the discipline of the religious sciences as the main reference language.

Students are exposed to Arabic morphology in greater depth by the venerated and reference books appropriate to the level of

students. Students will be exposed to knowledge wazan, either verbs or nouns. Students will learn the importance of Arabic

Page 107: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

107

morphology in knowledge translation to get the most accurate meaning to the original Arabic text.

References

Ibn Hishām, cAbd Allāh. 1979. Awḍaḥ al-Masālik Ilā Alfiyyah Ibn Mālik. Bayrūt: Dār al-Jīl.

Al-Hamlawī, Aḥmad. 1988. Sharḥ Qatar al-Nadā’ Wa Bal al-Sada. Bayrūt: Dār al-Jīl.

Ibn cAqayl, Bahā’ al-Dīn cAbd Allāh. 1994. Sharḥ Ibn cAqīl cAlā Alfiyyah Ibn Mālik: Dār al-Fikr.

Al-Hamlawī, Aḥmad. 2003. Shadha al-cUrf fī Fann al-Ṣarf. Bayrūt: Dār al-Qalam.

AI30503 METHODOLOGY OF DAKWAH

This course is generally a discussion of the dakwah, rankings and its importance in life, characteristics and methods preacher

preaching of the prophets of the target group. The course will also expose students to the application and the missionary

challenges of today.

References

Muḥammad Rajab. 1986. Dacwah al-Rusul Ilā Allāh Tacālā Ghāyatuhā Wa Tārīkhuhā. ṬanṬa: Mu’assasah Sacīd Li al-Ṭibācah.

Sidi Gazalba dan Zainab Ismail. 1994. Dakwah Islamiyyah Malaysia Masa Kini. Bangi: Penerbit UKM. Abdullah Muhammad Zin Che

Yusof Che Mat dan Ideris Endot. 1997. Prinsip Dan Kaedah Dakwah Dalam Arus Pembangunan Malaysia. Bangi: Penerbit UKM.

Al-Kaisi, Marwan Ibrahim. 2000. Morals And Manners In Islam: Guide To Islamic Adab. Kuala Lumpur: Islamic Book Trust.

Ab Aziz Muhammad Zin. 2001. Metodologi Dakwah. Sri Kembangan: Penerbitan Universiti Malaya.

Idayat Nataatmadja. 2001. Inteligensi Spiritual. Jakarta: Perenial Press.

Abū al-cAmaym, Aḥmad dan Muḥammad Jumcah. 2003. Manhaj al-Islām Fī al-Dacwah Ilā Allāh. Al- Manṣūrah: Dār al-Ḥarifi.

AI10603 MEMORIZING QURAN AND TAJWEED

The discussion on the basics of the science of Tajweed, makhraj (articulation) characters and properties of letters, laws Recitation

such as nun Sakinah and tanwin, land the mim that mushaddad, hukum mim Sakinah, Idgham mutamāthilayn, mutaqāribayn,

mutajānisayn , Hukum Lām and rā ', Hukum Mād, recitation reading by Hafs and Waqaf and Ibtida’'. In addition, students are

required to memorize a few verses choice.

References

Sacūdi, Aḥmad Sharbinī. t.th. Al-Fajr al-Jadīd Fi cIlm al-Tajwīd. Al-Qāhirah: Dār al-Manār.

Al-Ṣahtawī, Maḥmūd Rifacah cAnbar. t.th. Al-Tuḥfat al-cAnbariyah Fī Macrifah al-Aḥkām Qur’aniah. t.tp: Al-Markaziah li al-Machad

al-Azhariah.

Al-Qāri, cAbd al-Fataḥ. t.th. Al-Tajwīd cAlā Riwāyah Hafs cAn cĀsim bin Abī

al-Najwad. Madinah: Maktabat al-Dār

Mahadi Dahlan. 1996. Tajwid Ilmi Dan Amali Mengikut Kaedah Resam Uthmani. Kuala Lumpur: Pustaka Hj. Abdul Majid.

Najāh Ibrāhīm Muḥammad. 2008. Al-Tajwīd Wa al-Aṣwād. Al-Qāhirah: Dār al-Ḥadith.

AI20703 SCIENCE OF HADIS

This course discusses some Hadith Nabawi, the introduction of Hadith Studies, appearance, interests, preparation and collection

and varies with Qudsi Hadith and Quran. Also discussed al-Jarh and al-Tacdīl as well as a brief introduction about the books of

Page 108: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

108

Sunan acacia (Sahih Bukhari, Sahih Muslim, Sunan al-Tirmidhi, Sunan Abu Dawud, Sunan al-Nasaie and Sunan Ibn Majah)

References

Ṣāliḥ Ṣubḥī. 1991. CUlūm al-Ḥadīth wa Muṣṭalaḥuhu. Bayrūt: Dār al-cIlm Li al-Malāyīn.

Al-Naysābūrī, Muḥammad. 1997. Macrifah cUlūm al-Ḥadīth. Al-Sacūdiyyah al-cArabiyyah: al-Maktabah

Al-cIlmiyyah.

Ibn Kathīr. 1997. Al-Bācith al-Ḥadīth fī Sharḥ Ikhtiṣār cUlūm al-Ḥadīth. Jeddah: Dār al-Muayyad.

Al-Khāṭib, Muḥammad cIjāj. 1997. Uṣūl al-Ḥadīth wa cUlūmuh wa Muṣṭalaḥuh. Bayrūt: Dār al-Fikr.

Sālim, cAmrū cAbd al-Muncim. 2000. Taysīr cUlūm al-Ḥadīth Li al-Mubtadicin. Miṣr: Dār al-Ḍiyā’.

AI20303 ARABIC RHETORIC

The course was introduced as a requirement to learn the discipline of the religious sciences as the main reference language.

Students are exposed to science Arab rhetoric in depth by the venerated and reference books appropriate to the level of students.

Students will be exposed to bayān, ilmu macānī dan ilmu badīc that is beautiful by classical Arabic text either from the Quran,

Sunnah or Arabic literary texts.

References

Al-Marāghī, Aḥmad. t.th. cUlūm al-Balāghah. Bayrūt: Dār al-Qalam.

cAlī al-Jārim, Muṣṭāfā Amīn. 1993. Dalīl al-Balāghah al-Wāḍiḥaḥ. Al-Qāhirah :Dār al-Macārif.

Al-Hashimī, Aḥmad. 1994. Jawāhir al-Balāghah Fī al-Macānī wa al-Bayān wa al-Badīc. Bayrūt: Dār Iḥyā al-Turāth. Al-Maydanī, cAbd

al-Raḥman Ḥassan Habannakah. 1996. Al-Balāghah Al-cArabiyyah. Dimashq:Dār al-Qalam.

Al-Jurjānī,cAbd al-Qāhīr. 1998. Asrār al-Balāghah. Lubnān: Dār al-Macrifah.

AI20603 RESEARCH IN TAFSIR

This course discusses the progress of Tafsir, scriptures and commentaries venerated tafsir scholars. The students will also learn

about the interpretation of inner life and exposed to problems in interpreting the verses of the Quran.

References

Quran al-Karim

Al-Suyūṭī, cAbd al-Raḥman. 1967. Al-Itqān Fī cUlūm Qur’an. Miṣr: Maṭbacah al-Mashad al-Husayni.

Abū Shahbah, Muḥammad. 1987. Al-Israiliyyāt Wa al-Mawdūcāt Fī Kutub al-Tafs r. Al-Qāhirah: Maṭbacah al-Sunnah.

Ibn Kathīr, Abū al-Fiḍā Ismācīl. 1997. Tafsīr Qur’an al-cAz m. Bayrūt: Dār Iḥya’ al-Turāth al-cArabī.

Al-Rāzī, Fakhr al-Dīn. t.th. Al-Tafsīr al-Kabīr. Al-Qāhirah: al-Bahiyyah al-Miṣriyyah.

AI20803 USUL FIQH

This course discusses the introduction of Usul al-fiqh and history of its development, the division of the laws of sharia, law-taklifi

and waḍcī, a discussion of the arguments that was agreed, namely the Quran and Sunnah and things related to it, ijmāc and

drawing. It also discusses the arguments which are not agreed upon among scholars, al-Istihsan, al-masalih al-mursalah, al-

Istishab, al-curf, opinions companions, ṣād al-dharā'ic and practice of Medina.

References

Page 109: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

109

Imran Ahsan Khan Nyazee. 1994. Theories of Islamic Law. Islamabad: The International Institute Of Islamic Thought.

Al-Zuhaylī, Wahbah. t.th. Uūl al-Fiqh al-Islāmī, Bayrūt: Dār al-Fikr.

Al-Anṣāri, Abū Yaḥyā. t.th. Ghāyah al-Uṣūl Li Bāb al-Uṣūl. Al-Qāhirah: Maktabah Muṣṭafā al-Halabī.

Muḥammad al-Khudrī. t.th. Uṣūl Fiqh. Al-Qāhirah: Maktabah al-Tijārah. Badran, Abū al-cAynayn. t.th. Uṣūl al-Fiqh al-Islāmī.

Iskandariah: Mu’assasah Shabāb al-Jāmicah.

Zuhayr, Muḥammad. t.th. Uṣūl al-Fiqh. Al-Qāhirah: Dār-al-Ṭibācah al-Muḥammadiah.

AI30803 FIQH MUAMALAT

The discussion on the basics of Islamic Muamalat as the concept of rights, property ownership and contract or agreement;

transactions that exist and contracts civil as sales, loans (al-qard), rentals (al-Ijarah), the company, giving (grants), saving

(wadicah), representation (Wakalah), security (Kafalah), debt securities (hiwalah), charge (rahn), clearing of land (ihya 'al-wat),

shares of agriculture (muzāracah), goods discovery (luqatah) and endowments.

References

Al-Sharbinī, Muḥammad al-Khāṭib. 1985. Mughnī al-Muḥtāj. Miṣr: Syārikah Maktabah Wa Maṭbacah Muṣṭafā al-Bābī al-Ḥalabī.

Al-Jāzirī, cAbd al-Raḥman. 1986. Kitāb al-Fiqh cAlā al-Madhāhīb al-Arbacah. Bayrūt: Iḥyā’ al-Turāth al-cArabī.

Al-Zuhaylī, Wahbah. 1989. Al-Fiqh al-Islāmī Wa Adillatuh. Dimashq: Dār al-Fikr.

Al-Damshiqī, al-Husaynī. 1991. Kifāyat al-Akhyār Fī Ghāyat al-Ikhtiṣār. Bayrūt: Dār al-Khayr.

cAsyūr, Aḥmad cIsā. t.th. Al-Fiqh al-Muyassar. Al-Qāhirah: Maktabah al-Qur’an.

AI30703 RESEARH IN HADIS

This course discusses the hadith as a source of Islamic law. Reading issues and ways to understand the hadith also be discussed.

This will improve the ability to read, understand, analyze and synthesize examples of traditions that choose to be discussed. In

addition it can reassess the western view of the hadith and counter distortions by some of those who reject hadith.

References

Al-Nawawī. 1985. Rawḍah al-Ṭālibīn. Bayrūt: al-Maktabah al-Islāmī.

Al-Nawawī. 1987. Riyāḍ al-Ṣālihīn. t.tp: Maktabah al-Hilāl. Abū Shahbah, Muḥammad. 1991. Diffācan al-Sunnah. Bayrūt: Dār al-

Jayl.

Ibn Ḥajar al-cAsqalānī. 1993. Fatḥ al-Bāri Bi Sharḥ al-Bukhārī. Bayrūt: al-Maktabah al-Tijāriyyah.

Al-Zabidī, Aḥmad Ibn cAbd al-Lāṭif. 2003. Mukhtaṣar Ṣaḥīḥ al-Bukhārī. Riyāḍ: Markaz Fajr.

AI20403 TRANSLATION

The course aims to train students to translate a text from Arabic into English and Malay. This course examines the concepts,

aspects of the translation, the translation process and the problems of the linguistic, semantic and syntactic. Review and evaluate

the old translation Islamic texts including the Quran. This course provides training and how to translate idioms and modern or

classical texts from Arabic to English and Malay.

References

A.Widyamartaya. 1989. Seni Menterjemah. Yogyakarta: Penerbit Kanisius.

Page 110: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

110

Suhendra Yusuf. 1994. Teori Terjemah: Pengantar ke arah Pendekatan Lingguistik dan Sosiolinguistik. Bandung: Penerbit Mandar

Maju.

J.C Catford. 1996. Teori Linguistik Bagi Penterjemah. terj. Uma a/p Lyaroo. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa Dan Pustaka.

H.M Bukhari Lubis, Mohd. Fauzi Jumingan & Khairunnawa Mohamad. 1998. Penterjemahan Arab-Melayu-Arab: Peraturan dan

Dasar. Serdang: Penerbit Universiti Putra Malaysia.

Ainon Muhammad & Abdullah Hassan. 2000. Teori dan Teknik Terjemah. Kuala Lumpur: Persatuan Penterjemah Malaysia

AI30603 TASAWUF

The discussion on the concept of Islamic Sufism, the historical development of Sufism, bertasawuf purpose, the origins of Sufism,

a spiritual life and relationship with the Islamic moral and philosophical aspects of Sufism as Kashef, unity and Wahdatul Wujud.

References

Al-Sirrāj, Abū Naṣr al-Ṭūsī. 1960. Al-Lumac ed. CAbd al-Ḥalīm Maḥmūd dan Ṭaha cAbd al-Bāqī Surūr. Miṣr: Dār al-Kutub al-

Ḥadīthah.

Ghani, Qāsim. 1970. Tārīkh al-Taṣawwuf Fī al-Islām. Al-Qāhirah: Maktabah al-Nahḍah al-Islāmiyyah.

Al-Taftazanī, Abū al-Wafā’. 1976. Madkhal Ilā al-Tasawuf al-Islāmī. Miṣr: Maktabah al-Khanjī.

Ḥawā Sayyid. 1988. Al-Mustakhliṣ Fī Tazkiyah al-Anfus. Miṣr: Dār al-Salām.

Zakaria Stapa. 1995. Akhlak dan Tasawuf Islam. Kuala Lumpur: Berita Publishing Sdn. Bhd.

AI30903 ACADEMIC WRITING

Students are required to take a scientific exercise as much as 3 hours of credit. The thesis submitted for examination must meet

the standards and style of writing UMS. Students will sit for an oral examination after submission of a dissertation or thesis.

References

Samaruddin Rejab dan Nazri Abdullah. 1982. Panduan Menulis Tesis. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka

Pedoman Transliterasi Huruf Arab ke Huruf Rumi. 1984. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Bailey, Kenneth D. 1984. Kaedah Penulisan Sosial. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Asmah Haji Omar. 2006. Panduan Wacana Akademik Teori dan Penerapan. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

AI31003 ACADEMIC WRITING 2

Students are required to complete the final chapters and in the process of finding the next study will present the study of scientific

training according to the methodology determined by the faculty and submit according to the specific criteria.

References

Samaruddin Rejab dan Nazri Abdullah. 1982. Panduan Menulis Tesis. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka

Pedoman Transliterasi Huruf Arab ke Huruf Rumi. 1984. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Bailey, Kenneth D. 1984. Kaedah Penulisan Sosial. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Asmah Haji Omar. 2006. Panduan Wacana Akademik Teori dan Penerapan. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka

Page 111: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

111

AI31203 ISLAMIC THOUGHT

This course introduces students to the study of classical and modern Islamic thought, methodology and issues in various aspects

of Islamic thought. Discussions include attack Western thought. Among the issues discussed were the political, economic, socio-

cultural, globalization and its relationship with the Islamic and creed.

References

cUthmān, Fatḥi. 1960. Al-Dīn Fī Mawqif al-Aḍfac. Al-Qāhirah: Maktabah Wahbah.

Ahmad, Akbar S. 1992. Post Modernism and Islam: Predicament and Promise. London: Routledge.

Mohammad Kamil Hj. Abd Majid. 1993. Tokoh-tokoh Pemikir Islam. Petaling Jaya: Budaya Ilmu

Al-Dārinī, Fatḥi. 1998. Dirāsat Wa Buḥūth Fī al-Fikr al-Islāmī al-Mucassir. Dimashq: Dār al-Qutaybah.

Abdul Rahman Haji Abdullah. 1998. Pemikiran Islam di Malaysia: Sejarah dan Aliran. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

AI21103 FIQH SIRAH

This course is generally a discussion with the head of the Prophet emphasized some important events in his life by taking into

account the views of Islam and non-Muslim scholars. The study also covers the nature of the Prophet, including morals, behavior

and attributes of Prophet s.a.w.

References

Al-Buṭī, Muḥammad Sayd Ramaḍān. 1983. Fiqh Sīrah. Terj: Muḥammad Darus Sanawi. t.tp: Dewan Pustaka FajarIbn Hishām.

1995. Sīrah al-Nabawiyyah. Sunt: Muṣṭafā al-Saqa’, Ibrāhim al-Abiyari dan cAbd al-Hafiz Shalabī. Bayrūt: Dār Iḥyā’ al-Turāth al-

cArabī.

Al-Balaḍuri, Aḥmad bin Yaḥyā. 1996. Ansab al-Ashraf. Bayrūt: Dār al-Fikr.

Al-Ṭabarī, Abū Jacfar Muḥammad. 2005. Tārikh al-Rusul Wa al-Muluk. Bayrūt: Dār kutub al-cIlmiyyah

AI41103 ISLAMIC ADMINISTRATION

This course discusses the theory of nationalism and political Islam, political dynamics, reality and applications as well as the

obstacles and challenges.

References

Al-Jawziyyah, Ibn Qayyim. 1961. Al-Ṭuruq al-Ḥukmiyyah Fī al-Siyāsah al-Sharciyyah. Al-Qāhirah:

al-Mu’assasah al-cArabiyyah.

Abdul Monir Yaacob. 1996. Siyāsah Sharciyyah Dalam Pentadbiran Dan Perundangan.

Kuala Lumpur: IKIM.

cAbd al-Salām, Abī Muḥammad cIzzuddīn. t.th. Qawācid al-Aḥkām Fī Maṣāliḥ al-Anām. Bayrūt: Dār al-Kutub al-cIlmiyyah.

cAtwah, cAbd cAlī Aḥmad. t.th. Al-Madkhal Ilā al-Siyāsah al-Sharciyyah. Sacūdiyyah cArabiyyah: t.pt.

Ibn Taymiyyah. t.th. Al-Siyāsah al-Sharciyyah Fī Iṣlāḥ al-Rafciyyah. Al-Jazācir: Qash al-Kutub

al-Bulaydah

Page 112: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

112

AI31103 METHODOLOGY OF SYAFEI'S FIQH

This course introduces the background of the Shafie sect, figures, writings and books venerated Shafie sect. The course also

analyzes the method of determining the law of the Shafie sect and its resources.

References

Al-Khin, Muṣṭafā. 1987. Al-Fiqh al-Manhajī cAlā Madhhab al-Imām al-Shācfī. Dimashq: Dār

al-Qalam.

Al-Shuqfah, Khālid ibn cAbd Allāh. 1989. Kitāb al-Dirāsah al-Fiqhiyyah cAlā Madhhab al-Shāficyyah. Miṣr: Dār al-Salām al-Sharīf.

Manāc, Hāshim Ṣāliḥ. 1989. Shafie Fī al-cArūḍ Wa al-Qawāfī. Bayrūt: Dār al-Fikr al-cArabī.

Abī al-Ḥusayn, Yaḥyā bin al-Khayr bin Sālim. 2000. Al-Bayān Fī Madhhab al-Imām al-Shācfī. Bayrūt: Dār al-Minhāj.

Abū Zahrah, Muḥammad. t.th. Shafie: Hayātuh Wa cAṣruh Wa Arā`uh Wa Fiqhuh. Al-Qāhirah: Dār Fiqh al-cArabiyyah.

AI31403 RESEARCH OF SUNNI

This course discusses the history of the founders, leaders and members of the thought flow Sunnah wal Jamaah. Also debated

issues relating to enlighten students about the flow Sunnah wal Jamaah members of a Muslim minority stake in the world today,

including in Malaysia.

References

Al-Māturidī, Abū Manṣūr Muḥammad. 1971. Kitāb al-Tawḥīd. Taḥqīq Fatḥ Allāh Khallab. Bayrūt: Dār al-Mashriq.

Ḥassan cAlī ibn Ismācīl. 1997. Al-Ibānah cAn Uṣūl al-Diyānah. Taḥqīq Fawqiyyah Ḥusin Maḥmūd.

Al-Qāhirah: Dār al-Anṣār.

Muṣṭafā Ḥilmī. t.th. Manhaj cUlamāc al-Ḥadīth Wa Sunnah Fī Uṣūl al-Dīn. Iskandariyyah: Dār

al-Dacwah.Abū Zahra’. t.th. Tārikh al-Madhāhib al-Islāmiyyah. Miṣr: Dār al-Fikr al-cArabī

AI31303 STATISTICS AND ISLAM

This course introduces statistical Islam and its application in the field of Islamic studies. In addition, methods and techniques to

process and analyze data are also discussed.

References

Allen L.Edwards. 1974. Statistical Analysis For Students In Psychology And Education. New York Holt: Rinehert and Winston.

Mohd. Nawi Abd. Rahman. 1998. Asas Statistik. Serdang: Penerbit Universiti Putra Malaysia.

Chua Yan Piaw. 2006. Asas Statistik Penyelidikan. Kuala Lumpur: McGraw-Hill.

Bhasah Abu Bakar. 2007. Kaedah Analisis Data Penyelidikan Ilmiah. Kuala Lumpur: Utusan Publications & Distributions.

Agus Irianto. 2008. Statistik Konsep Dasar dan Aplikasinya. T.tp: Prenada Media Group.

AI40903 COMPORATIVE PHYLOSOPHY

Discussions submit the standards used in the study of comparative philosophy of Western philosophical framework identifies

differences including Greek philosophy and Eastern philosophy of Islam with India, China and Japan in addition to studying the

question of divine and human nature in both philosophy.

Page 113: COURSE SYNOPSIS - Universiti Malaysia Sabahbpa.ums.edu.my/images/dokumen/Prospektus/2020/FKSW/...CM11401 MUSIC SOFTWARE NOTATION This course focuses on the usage of Music Notation

113

References

Saher, P.J. 1969. Eastern Wisdom And Western Thought. London: George Allen and Unwin ltd.

Blackwoo, R.T. and Herman, A.L. 1975. Problems In Philosophy: East and West. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall Inc.

Feibleman, James K. 1976. Understanding Oriental Philosophy. New York: Horizon Press Bahm, Archie J. 1977. Comparative

Philosophy. New Mexico: World Books.

Marson-Oursel, Paul. 2000. Comprative Philosophy. London: Routledge.

AI40503 COMPORATIVE FIQH

This course introduces students to the differences of opinion among the members of fiqh and its causes, ijtihad and opinions in

matters of worship, jurisprudence and crime.

References

Al-Jāzirī, cAbd al-Raḥman. 1986. Kitāb al-Fiqah cAlā al-Madhāhib al-Arbacah. Bayrūt: Iḥyā’ al-Turāth al-cArabī.

Al-Zuhaylī, Wahbah. 1998. Manāhij al-Ijtihād Fī al-Madhāhib al-Mukhtalifah. Dimashq: Dār

al-Maktab.

Al-cAsqar, cUmar Sulaymān. 1998. Al-Madkhal Ilā Dirāsah al-Madāris Wa al-Madhāhib al-Fiqahiyyah. CAmmān: Dār al-Nafā’is.

Muṣṭafā Sacīd al-Khān. t.th. Athār al-Ikhtilāf Fī al-Qawācid al-Uṣuliyyah Fī Ikhtilāf al-Fuqahā’. Bayrūt: Mu’assasah al-Risālah.

AI40703 CONTEMPORARY ISSUES OF ISLAM

This course introduces students to the study of classical Islamic thought, modernity, methodology and issues of Islamic thought in

various aspects. The discussion covers current issues and economics, the socio-culture of the nation, its globalization and its

relationship to sharia and faith.

References

cUthmān, Fatḥi. 1960. Al-Dīn Fī Mawqif al-Aḍfac. Al-Qāhirah: Maktabah Wahbah. Ahmad, Akbar S. 1992. Post Modernism and

Islam: Predicament and Promise. London: Routledge.

Mohammad Kamil Hj. Abd Majid. 1993. Tokoh-tokoh Pemikir Islam. Petaling Jaya: Budaya Ilmu Al-Dārinī, Fatḥi. 1998. Dirāsat Wa

Buḥūth Fī al-Fikr al-Islāmī al-Mucassir. Dimashq: Dār al-Qutaybah.

Abdul Rahman Haji Abdullah. 1998. Pemikiran Islam di Malaysia: Sejarah dan Aliran. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka

AI40306 INTERNSHIP

This course aims to give students a real world of work experience. During the course of the training, students will be exposed and

given the opportunity to apply all of the knowledge learned in the classroom to real-world situations

References

Panduan Menulis Tesis & Disertasi Gaya UMS 2018 Ahmad Sunawari Long. 2015. Metodologi Penyelidikan Pengajian Islam. Bangi:

Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia